12818 daylight circle st. louis county, mo

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:

9812 Manchester RoadSt. Louis, Missouri 63119

T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751

www.triarchitects.comC Copyright 2018

TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A000COVER SHEET

18-009

CMB

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

ARCHITECTURAL Bid

/ Pe

rmit

Set 0

6-25

-18

A000 COVER SHEET ●A002 SPECIFICATIONS ●A003 SPECIFICATIONS ●A004 SPECIFICATIONS ●A005 SPECIFICATIONS ●A006 SPECIFICATIONS ●A007 SPECIFICATIONS ●A010 DOOR SCHEDULE & TYPICAL DETAILS ●A011 TYPICAL DETAILS ●A020 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN ●A101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN ●A102 SECOND FLOOR PLAN ●A110 ROOF PLAN ●A120 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN ●A130 ENLARGED PLANS ●A201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS ●A301 BUILDING SECTIONS ●A302 WALL SECTIONS ●A303 WALL SECTIONS ●A304 WALL SECTION DETAILS ●

STRUCTURALS1.1 GENERAL NOTES ●S1.2 GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS ●S1.3 TYPICAL DETAILS ●S2.1 FOUNDATION PLAN ●S2.1A DIMENSIONED FOUNDATION PLAN ●S2.2 SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN ●S2.3 ROOF FRAMING PLAN ●S2.3B MANSARD ROOF FRAMING ●S2.3C PARTIAL ROOF LOADING PLAN ●S2.4 BRACING ELEVATIONS ●S2.5 BRACING ELEVATIONS ●S2.6 BRACING ELEVATIONS ●S2.8 STAIR PLANS ●S3.1 SECTIONS ●S3.2 SECTIONS ●S3.3 SECTIONS ●

GENERAL NOTES

ABBREVIATIONS

SYMBOLS

CODE ANALYSIS

DRAWING INDEX

A10

CONCRETE BLOCK

RIGID INSULATION

BATT INSULATION

BLOCKING

BRICK

A10

P3

A10

5

5

CONCRETE 5 COL. GRID

TEMPERED GLASS

EXISTING CONSTR. REMOVED

EXISTING CONSTR. TO REMAIN

NEW CONSTRUCTION

DETAIL

PARTITION TYPE

WALL SECTION

101ROOM

T

ROOM

BUILDING SECTION COL

1. AIA DOCUMENT A-201 , GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, CURRENT EDITION, AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS AS NOTED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL, SHALL GOVERN THE WORK.

2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL VERIFY EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES TO THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY.

3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CROSS-REFERENCE THE VARIOUS DISCIPLINES' PLANS HEREIN AND REVIEWED SHOP DRAWINGS PRIOR TO STARTING CONSTRUCTION PHASE OF CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES TO THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY.

4. ONLY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AND REVIEWED SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DISTRIBUTION OF SAID DOCUMENTS AND UPDATES TO THE FIELD FOR CONSTRUCTION.

5. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE THE SUBCONTRACTOR WORK WITH THESE PROJECT DOCUMENTS.

6. DIMENSIONS TO THE EXTERIOR OF THE BUILDING ARE TO THE EXTERIOR OF FOUNDATION/MASONRY UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

7. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS.

8. THE WORD 'ALIGN' AS USED IN THESE DOCUMENTS SHALL SUPERSEDE DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION.

9. NO PRODUCTS CONTAINING ASBESTOS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN OR USED DURING THE CONSTRUCTION OF THIS PROJECT. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CERTIFY TO THE OWNER THAT THIS REQUIREMENT HAS BEEN COMPLIED WITH.

10. ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CURRENT APPLICABLE MECHANICAL CODE AND INSTALLED PER SMACNA RECOMMENDATIONS.

11. CODE COMPLIANCE - THE WORK SHALL BE GOVERNED BY ALL CURRENT APPLICABLE LOCAL, CITY, STATE AND NATIONAL CODES AND LAWS. THESE AUTHORITIES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE, NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION OR ANY OTHER AUTHORITY OR BODY HAVING JURISDICTION OVER WORK. THE SITE, PARKING LOT, AND BUILDING SHALL COMPLY WITH THE ADA (AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT) REGULATIONS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY REQUIRED CHANGES TO COMPLY WITH ADA.

12. REFERENCE CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR SITE WORK, INCLUDING THE BUILDING LOCATION ON THE SITE.

CONTRACTOR INSTALLED

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE

INSULATIONINSUL

MEDIUM DENSITY

MECHANICALFIBERBOARD

METAL

MASONRY OPENING

LAVATORY

MASONRY

JOINT

MDF

MTLMECH

LAV

MOMSRY

JT

WOOD

SIMILAR

PARTICLE BOARDHIGH DENSITY

HOURHEIGHT

HARDWOOD

GYPSUM

FIRE RETARDANTFINISH FLOORFINISH GRADE

GENERAL CONTR.

FLOOR

ELEVATION

EXPANSION JOINT

FEET

EQUALEQUIPMENTEXISTING

EDGE OF SLAB

DOWNSPOUT

ELECTRICAL

DOOR

DRAWING

TOP OF

HTHR

HDWDHDPB

FL

GCGYP

FGFFFR

VERTICAL

WITH OUT

VESTIBULE

WATERPROOFWEIGHTWITH

TYPICALTONGUE & GROOVE

UNFINISHED

ELEV

FT

EJ

EQEQUIPEXIST

EOSELEC

DWG

DRDS

STRUCTURALSUSPENDED

TELEPHONETHICK

STEEL

STAINLESS STEELSTANDARD

SQUARESQUARE FOOT

SOLID CORESPECIFICATION

CONTRACTOR INSTALLEDCONTRACTOR FURNISHED

CORNER GUARDCONTROL JOINT

DETAILDIAMETER

CONTRACTOR

CONC. MASONRY UNIT

CERAMIC TILECENTER LINE

CONCRETE

CONTINOUS

CLEAR

AT

CEILING

BOTTOM OFBOARDBLOCK

ABOVE FINISH FLOOR

ALUMINUMAND

ABOVE

ACOUSTICAL

CG

DTLDIA

CJ

CFCI

CONCCMUCONTCONTR

CTCLR

ROOF DRAIN

SECTION

ROUGH OPENING

SCHEDULE

SHEET

ROOM

REQUIRED

REFERENCEREINFORCING

PRESSURE TREATED

RADIUS

@

CLG

BO

BLKBD

ALUM &

ABVAFFACT

OWNER INSTALLED

OPENING

PAINTED

PLYWOODPLASTIC LAMINATE

ON CENTER

OWNER FURNISHED

NOT IN CONTRACTNOT TO SCALE

OWNER FURNISHED

W/OWD

SIM

VERTVEST

W/

WPWT

TYPT&G

UNOUNF

TO

SUSP

STLSTRUCT

THKTEL

SPEC

STD

SQ

SSSF

SC

RD

SECTSHT

SCHED

RORM

RAD

REINFRCPREQ'D

RE:

PT

OPNG

PLAMPTD

PLYWD

OC

NICNTS

OFCI

OFOI

BUILDING CODE: 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE

ELECTRICAL CODE: 2009 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ENERGY CODE: 2009 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE

MECHANICAL CODE: 2009 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE

PLUMBING CODE: 2009 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE (W/ ST. LOUIS COUNTY AMENDMENTS)

FIRE CODE: 2009 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE

CONSTRUCTION TYPE: V-B

USE GROUP: B (BUSINESS)

FIRE PROTECTION: FULLY-SPRINKLERED

ACCESSIBILITY: 2010 ADA ACCESSIBILITY CODE

● = REVISED SHEET○ = REISSUED SHEET/NO REVISIONX = ISSUED AS 8.5x11

CL

06-25-18 (BID / PERMIT SET)

12818 DAYLIGHT CIRCLEST. LOUIS COUNTY, MOPROJECT NO.:

ISSUE DATE:

18-009

PROJECT DIRECTORYClient

Structural Engineer

Mech. / Elec. / Plumb. Eng.

Architect

Civil Engineer

PARADIGM FINANCIAL ADVISORS,LLC

AEDIFICA CASE ENGINEERING

DESIGN / BUILD

STOCK & ASSOCIATES

TR,i ARCHITECTS9812 MANCHESTER ROADST. LOUIS, MISSOURI 63119PHONE: 314.395.9750FAX: 314.395.9751

257 CHESTERFIELD BUSINESS PARKWAYST. LOUIS, MO 63005PHONE: 636.530.9100

796 MERUS COURTST. LOUIS, MO 63026PHONE: 636.349.1600

12231 MANCHESTER ROADDES PERES, MO 63131PHONE: 314.966.3400

TENANT CRITERIAGROSS SHELL BUILDING AREA = 14,170 SF

OCCUPANT LOAD CALC (TABLE 1004.1.2)

BUSINESS (1ST FLOOR) 7,085 / 100 OCC. = 71BUSINESS (2ND FLOOR) 7,085 / 100 OCC. = 71TOTAL OCCUPANTS: = 142 OCCUPANTS

EGRESS LOADING (1005.1)

DOORS71 OCCUPANTS (PER FLOOR) x 0.20 PER OCCUPANT = 14.2"EXITS REQUIRED = 2 @ 7.1" / EXITEXITS PROVIDED = 2 @ 33" / EXIT

MINIMUM NUMBER OF FIXTURES (UPC - SILCO AMENDED TABLE 4-1)NOTE: ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES ARE TO BE PROVIDED IN SEPARATE TENANT FINISH PERMIT DOCUMENTS.

TOTAL OCCUPANTS: = 142 (71 MALE, 71 FEMALE)

FIXTURES MENS REQUIRED PROVIDEDWATER CLOSET 3 3URINAL 1 1LAVATORIES 2 3

WOMENSWATER CLOSET 4 4LAVATORIES 2 3

DRINKING FOUNTAIN 1 EA. FLOOR 1ST FLOOR TENANT PROVIDING BOTTLED WATER2ND FLOOR HI/LO DRINKING FOUNTAIN

SERVICE SINK 1 EA. FLOOR 2

PROJECT LOCATION

LOCATION MAP

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A002SPECIFICATIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WITH AND WITHOUT MVRA (SEE STRUCT. DWGS. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.1. All interior slabs to receive glue down flooring shall have a High Performance Concrete

Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA) for all new concrete slabs, including slab-ongrade, elevated slabs, roof decks, stair treads and landings.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Welding certificates.B. Material certificates.C. Material test reports.D. Sample life of the concrete warranty for MVRAE. Sample adhesion guarantee for MVRA.F. Sample moisture letter for MVRA.G. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products

and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.1. Personnel conducting field sampling on behalf of the MVRA manufacturer shall be qualified

as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:1. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."2. ACI Publications: For slabs to receive moisture sensitive coatings or material, comply with

the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:a. ACI 302.2R-06, "Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring".

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.1. Slab Moisture Testing and Evaluation: Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be

certified in the conduct of ASTM D5084 under the supervision of a licensed geotechnical engineer. The determination as to whether the concrete slab is prepared to receive flooring, coatings, roofing, etc. rests with the MVRA manufacturer.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.1. Verify all are familiar with MVRA project specific quality control procedures, review concrete

mix designs and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Each entity directly concerned with MVRA dosed concrete must attend in person, conference call, or provide electronic review of documents, mix designs and procedures.

1.4 WARRANTYA. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA):

1. MVRA must be installed according to, and in compliance with, the manufacturer's published data sheet to include, but not limited to:a. Dosing instructions.b. Onsite representation and sampling requirements.c. Use of an ASTM E 1745 vapor retarder installed following ASTM E 1643 and ASTM

F710 guidelines; elevated slabs to receive flooring do not require a vapor retarderd. The design and specifications for roof deck assemblies, to include but not limited to,

the use of air barriers and/or vapor retarders is the sole responsibility of the design professional and is excluded from this warranty as are any costs incurred due to roofing overburden.

2. Manufacturer's Warranty: To include:a. Term: Life of the concrete.b. Repair and/or removal of failed flooring or roofing.c. Placement of a topical moisture remediation system.d. Replacement of flooring/roofing materials like original installed to include material

and labor.3. Adhesion Warranty: MVRA Manufacturer shall provide an adhesion warranty to

match the term of the adhesive and/or primer manufacturer's material defect warranty upon MVRA manufacturer's acceptance of field bond test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALSA. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide

lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENTA. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

1. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I zinc coated after fabrication and bending.

B. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALSA. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source, throughout Project:1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal.

C. Water: Replaced by Barrier One Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture for floor slab

2.4 ADMIXTURESA. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.B. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (In Interior floors to receive glue down flooring): “Barrier One

High Performance Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture” manufactured by Barrier One, Inc..; 522 S. Hunt Club Blvd., #303, Apopka, Florida 32703; Contact Manufacturer's representative: P: 877.224.5850, F: 866.594.3490 or Email at: [email protected]

C. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERSA. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

This specification section is only for items shown and detailed on Architectural plans. All other site concrete pavement shall be installed per specifications on the Civil drawings.

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:

1. Loading Pads.2. Trash enclosure pads3. Curbs and gutters adjacent to building.4. Walkways.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with

ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENTA. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat

sheets.B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALSA. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source throughout the Project:a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.E. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, of type suitable for application, certified by

manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

2.3 CURING MATERIALSA. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to

fresh concrete.B. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALSA. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber

2.5 WHEEL STOPSA. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete

1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter,10-inch (254-mm) minimum length.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURESA. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa)2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.453. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).4. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired

equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENTA. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting

reinforcement.

3.4 JOINTSA. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at

locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement.

E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENTA. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or

drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.D. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface

plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

3.6 FLOAT FINISHINGA. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and

concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.1. Medium Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete

surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURINGA. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures.B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy

conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these methods.

3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCESA. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm).2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6

mm).4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.

3.9 WHEEL STOPSA. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels

embedded in holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one-quarter to one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONA. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not

comply with requirements in this Section.B. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement.C. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep

concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION 02751

GENERAL NOTES:

General Contractor and subcontractors shall verify existing field conditions prior to the start of construction and shall report any discrepancies to the Architect immediately.

General Contractor shall cross-reference the various disciplines' plans herein and reviewed shop drawings prior to starting construction/phase of construction and shall report any discrepancies to the Architect immediately.

Only contract documents approved for construction and reviewed shop drawings shall be used for construction. General Contractor shall be responsible for distribution of said documents and updates to the field for construction.

It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to coordinate the subcontractor work with these project documents.

Reference civil drawings for site work, including the building location on the site.

No products containing asbestos shall be installed in, or used during the construction of this project. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to certify to the Owner that this requirement has been complied with.

Dimensions are to the finish or center of objects unless noted otherwise on the plans.

DO NOT scale drawings.

The word "align" as used in these documents shall supersede dimensional information.

Code Compliance - The Work shall be governed by all applicable local, city, state and national laws and codes. These authorities include, but are not limited to, the National Electric Code, the American Concrete Institute, National Fire Protection Association, or any other authority of body having jurisdiction over Work. The building and parking lot shall comply with the ADA regulation (Accessibility for Handicapped).

SPECIFICATIONS:

00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders," is hereby incorporated into the Procurement and Contracting Requirements by reference in addition to the requirements listed below.

Before submitting bid, it is important that bidder visit the site, carefully examine plans and fully inform himself as to all existing condition and limitations affecting the proposal.

The Bidder shall investigate all required fees, permits, and regulatory requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and properly include in the submitted bid. The cost of such fees, permits, and requirements are not provided by Owner unless specifically directed otherwise.

Bids shall be considered inclusive of all work pertinent to each category of the work bid, unless qualified otherwise in writing in the bid.

The bid documents and addendums will be issued to the bidders via a ShareFile site managed by the Architect. A ShareFile link will be issued to each bidder that will be accessible for 30 days, after 30 days the link will expire. This information may be shared with sub-contractors as well. After the before mentioned expiration it will be the Owner and Contractor to save the drawing files to their network systems for their use. Repeated issuance of new ShareFile links by the Architect may be charged as additional services at the Architect’s discretion.

Owner may elect to disqualify a bid due to failure to submit a bid in the form requested, failure to bid requested alternates or unit prices, failure to complete entries in all blanks in the Bid Form, or inclusion by the Bidder of any alternates, conditions, limitations or provisions not called for.

The Owner reserves the right to reject a bid based on Owner's and Architect's evaluation of qualification information submitted following opening of bids. Owner's evaluation of the Bidder's qualifications will include: status of licensure and record of compliance with licensing requirements, record of quality of completed work, record of Project completion and ability to complete, record of financial management including financial resources available to complete Project and record of timely payment of obligations, record of Project site management including compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, record of and number of current claims and disputes and the status of their resolution, and qualifications of the Bidder's proposed Project staff and proposed subcontractors.

The bidder shall provide a list of major subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers furnishing or installing products no later than two business days if the Owner or Architect request such list. Include those subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers providing work totaling three percent or more of the Bid amount. Do not change subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers from those submitted without approval of Architect and Owner.

Bids shall be submitted in the format and time frame as required by the Owner.

The bidder shall identify all addendums included in their bid on the bid form. The owner reserves the right to throw out any bids that excluded any addendums issued in compliance with the requirements outlined in these contract documents.

00320 - GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

Bidders are required to examine the Geotech report (copies of which are available at the office of the Owner and Geotechnical Engineer) and make their own investigation of the site before bidding. The report is provided only for the information and the convenience of bidders. Owner and Architect disclaim any responsibility for the information contained therein.

00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

AIA Document A201 - 2007 Edition of General Condition of the Contract for Construction and the Supplemental Conditions below, shall be the governing document in regards to Owner, Contractor, Architect roles during construction and shall be the outline in which the Architect follows to oversee the construction. These requirements are the minimum recommendations of the Architect, any agreements for construction in place between the Owner and Contractor are independent to these General Conditions and if conflicts occur between these General Conditions and the independent contract for construction between the Owner and Contractor the contract for construction shall supersede.

00800 - SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS

The following supplements modify the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” AIADocument A201, 2007 Edition. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by theseSupplementary General Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.ARTICLE 1; GENERAL PROVISIONS

a. Delete Clause 1.1.1 and replace with the following:

The Contract Documents: These construction documents shall be made a part of the contract for construction between the owner and contractor. All requirements within these General Conditions shall be considered minimum requirements for construction all more specific requirements with the contract between owner and contractor shall supersede these requirements.

b. Delete Clause 1.1.2 and replace with the following:

The Contract: The Contract when referenced in these general conditions shall reference these construction documents and any and all other contract documents prepared and agreed to by the owner and contractor. The contract shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or, (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the contract and within these General Conditions intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.

c. Add Paragraph 1.2.4

1.2.4 - If discrepancies appear among contract documents, Contractor shall request interpretation in writing before proceeding with the work. Should conflicts between drawings and specifications exist, Contractor is deemed to have included the more expensive method of doing work in his bid unless he has asked for and obtained a written decision before submission of his proposal as to which method or materials will be required.

c. Add Paragraph 1.2.5

1.2.5 - Before ordering material or doing work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions and job conditions, and shall take measurements at the job and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. Any discrepancies between the drawings and specifications and existing conditions shall be referred to the Architect for adjustment before any work affected thereby has been performed.

ARTICLE 3; CONTRACTOR

a. 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor

1.) Add Paragraph 3.2.2.1

3.2.2.1 - The Contractor or any Subcontractor, before commencing work on any surface which receives or is the base of other materials, shall thoroughly inspect and report to the Architect any defects which will affect the application, finish or fastening of such materials to this surface. Commencement of work on such surface will constitute the Contract's acceptance of the surface.

b. 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures

1.) Add Paragraph 3.3.4

3.3.4 - The Contractor shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keep excavations, pits, trenches and floors free of water. The Contractor shall at all times provide protection against rain, wind, storms, frost, and heat, so as to maintain all work and materials free from damage. At the end of each day's work, all new work likely to be damaged shall be protected properly. If low temperatures make it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold weather precautions, the Contractor shall cease work and shall notify the Architect immediately.


3.3.5 - All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned, in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions (latest edition) unless specified to the contrary. Where reference is made to manufacturer's directions, Contractor shall have, on file at the job site office, a copy of each direction.

c. 3.4 Labor and Materials

1.) Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.4 and 3.4.5:

3.4.4 - After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in these General Conditions and Division 01635 of the Specifications.

3.4.5 - By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor:

.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;

.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified;

.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and

.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.

d. 3.5 Warranty


3.5.2 - All special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be secured by the Contractor who shall submit 2 copies of each to the Architect before final Application for Payment. Architect will forward one copy of each to Owner. For warranty period and other requirements, see Article 12.


3.5.3 - If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any of the work is found by the Owner to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.

e. 3.7 Permits, Fees, and Notices:

1.) Add to Paragraph 3.7.1 the following:

Permits, fees, and licenses necessary for the execution of the mechanical and electrical work shall be secured and paid for by the Subcontractors involved.

f. 3.9 Superintendent

1.) ADD the following subparagraph 3.9.4

3.9.4 Each major Subcontractor shall be under the constant supervision of a qualified superintendent or foreman. The above requirements regarding superintendent shall apply to the superintendent for each Subcontractor as well as the superintendent for the general contract work. Superintendents may not be changed without written approval of Architect. Provide list of Superintendent, principal of firm, and phone no. of each when requested by Architect.

g. 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

1.) Add paragraphs 3.12.5.1, 3.12.5.2, and 3.12.5.3

3.12.5.1 - The Architect will not accept for review any submittal which has not been approved by the General Contractor and submitted according to Section 3.12 of the General Conditions and Section 01330 Submittals of Specifications.

3.12.5.2 - Section 01330 Submittals establishes method and procedure for all submissions required by the Contract Documents.

3.12.5.3 - Color samples for all materials requiring color selection shall be submitted within 30 days after signing of contract for general construction.

h. 3.15 Cleaning Up:

1.) Add paragraphs 3.15.1.1 and 3.15.1.2

3.15.1.1 - Contractor shall clean all glass; replace all broken glass; remove paint stains, spots, marks and dirt from finished surfaces; clean all hardware; clean all fixtures; clean and vacuum carpets; wash and polish all other floor surfaces. Contractor shall also comply with all special cleaning instructions contained in the specifications. Contractor shall keep interior of building free of stored or unattended combustible materials.

3.15.1.2 - Areas of the building that are to be occupied by the Owner prior to completion of the entire project shall be given a final cleaning by the Contractor prior to such occupancy.

ARTICLE 7; CHANGES IN THE WORK

a. 7.2 Change Orders1.) Revise paragraphs 7.2.1 to the following:

7.2.1 – A Changer Order is a written instrument prepared by the Contractor and signed by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor stating their agreement upon the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, in any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extend of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 8; TIME

a. 8.1 Definitions

1.) Delete Subparagraph 8.1.4 and substitute the following:

8.1.4 - The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean working day, excluding weekends and legal holidays.

b. 8.2 Progress and Completion


8.2.4 - Work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterrupted at such rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time specified. By executing the contract, the Contractor expressly understands and agrees that the time for the completion of the work described therein is a reasonable time for the completion of same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.

ARTICLE 9; PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

a. 9.2 Schedule of Values

1.) Add the following sentence to 9.2.1

The Schedule of Values shall be prepared in such manner that each item of work and each subcontracted item of work is shown on a single line of AIA Document G703, Application and Certificate for Payment, Continuation Sheet.

b. 9.3 Applications for Payment

1.) Add the following sentence to Paragraph 9.3.1:

An appropriate Waiver of Lien Certification, executed by the Contractor and each Supplier and Subcontractor, covering all labor and materials in full for the previous month shall be submitted to the Architect together with each Application for Payment for forwarding to the Owner.


9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay 90 percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments.

ARTICLE 11; INSURANCE AND BONDS


11.1.1.9 - Contractor's liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and shall be on a comprehensive basis including:

.1 premises - Operation

.2 Explosion, Collapse and Underground

.3 Products/Completed Operations - to be maintained for 5 years after final payment and acceptance by Owner..4 Contractual, including indemnification provisions under Paragraph 3.18 (Broad Form)..5 Broad Form coverage for property damage including completed operations..6 Personal Injury Liability – Normal.7 Umbrella Liability


11.1.2.1 – The Architect makes the following minimum recommendations for Limits of Liability amounts as follows:

Workmen's CompensationContractor's Liability (11.1.1.9.1, 11.1.9.2, 11.1.1.9.3, 11.1.1.9.4, 11.1.1.9.5, and 11.1.1.9.6, 11.1.1.9.7)

Bodily Injury and Property Damage Aggregate Limit $2,000,000

Bodily Injury and Property Damage Occurrence Limit $1,000,000

Property Damage Liability Insurance shall include coverage for the following hazards: explosion, collapse, underground

Personal Injury, Annual Aggregate: $1,000,000

Commercial Automotive Liability:

Bodily Injury and Property Damage $1,000,000

Umbrella Liability Limit: $5,000,000

As stated these are the Architect’s recommended minimum Liability insurance coverage amounts. Any other insurance requirements outlined in the contractual agreement between the Owner and Contractor shall supersede these.

3.) Add paragraph 11.1.2.2

11.1.2.2 - The Owner reserves the right of approval of the insurance company or companies by whom any of the foregoing insurance protection is to be written, and Contractor agrees to provide such insurance only through such insurance company or companies as meets the approval of the Owner.


11.1.2.3 - In the event of the happening of anything, liability for which is herein assumed, the Contractor agrees to forthwith notify the Owner in writing of such happening, which notice shall set out in details of such happenings, the cause as far as can be ascertained, the estimate of loss or damage done, the names of witnesses, if any, and the amount of any claim.

5.) Add paragraph 11.1.2.4

11.1.2.4 - The Contractor shall require all subcontractors to comply with the same laws and to furnish, pay for, and maintain the same types, terms, and amounts of insurance as required of the Contractor by this Division.


11.1.2.5 – The Owner or any affiliates shall be named as a primary additional insured on the Contractors’ Liability and umbrella policies and the policies should contain a waiver of subrogation” provision in the Owner's favor.

7.) Add Paragraph 11.1.5:

11.1.4 - The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of Certificates of Insurance herein required for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Subparagraphs 11.1.1, 11.1.2 and 11.1.3. The form of Certificates shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. The Contractor shall furnish to Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits.

ARTICLE 14; TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

a. 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR

1) Add Paragraph 14.1.5:

14.1.5 – The agreed upon contract between Owner and Contractor shall supersede any and all justifications for termination of the contract by the Contractor if conflicts occur between these General Conditions and the independent contract for construction between the Owner and Contractor.

ARTICLE 15; TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

a. 15.1.2 Notice of Claims:

1) Revise paragraph 15.1.2 to as follows:

15.1.2 – Claims by the Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and the initial decision maker if applicable within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim. The owner must provide written notice with 21 days after recognition of the condition giving rise to the Claim.

2) Delete paragraphs 15.1.6, 15.1.6.1, and 15.1.6.2 and replace with the following:

00911 ADDENDUM

Addendum will be issued using the Architect’s typical addendum form and will issued via a ShareFile link as described in the instructions to bidders.

No addendums will be issued within 48 hours of the bid time and date unless the bid date is extended as part of the addendum.

01100 SUMMARYThe following is the basic project information:

Project Identification: Office Building at Sunset Ridge development

Project Location: St. Louis County, Missouri 63131

Owner: Paradigm Financial Advisors, LLC 12231 Manchester Road Des Peres, MO 63131

Architect: TR,i Architects 9812 Manchester Road Saint Louis, MO 63119 Contact: Dave Yancik E-mail: [email protected] Phone: 314-395-9750

The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:The project shall include 'core and shell' construction for an office building totaling 14,170 square feet. Tenant finish plans to be completed at a later date, verify timeframe with Owner.

01230 SHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

See exterior material legend on sheet A201.

01310 - PROJECT COORDINATION

Coordinate construction activities included under various sections of these specifications to assume efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work.

Where installation of one part of the work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results.

Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form acceptable to the Architect. The Architect and/or the Architect’s consultant will respond to the RFI within 5 days. If additional information is required or the RFI needs to be forwarded onto another entity for response the Architect will notify the contractor as soon as possible.

01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

The contractor shall provide a construction schedule for review and a schedule of values to the Owner and Architect within 5 business days of being released on construction.

The contractor shall provide weekly progress reports with weekly construction progress schedules and progress photos to the Owner and Architect. Schedule conflicts and or delays shall be brought to the attention to the Owner in the weekly reports.

An updated overall construction schedules shall be issued at least on a monthly basis with a weekly progress report. All changes to the schedule from the previous schedule shall be identified in a report and justification for the change shall be provided.

Final detailed photographic documentation shall be submitted to the Architect of both the interior and exterior at which time the contractor is requesting a substantial completion inspection. The contractor shall provide a report identifying the minor items that need to be completed with the photographs. If there are substantial items that are not identified in the report submitted to the Architect and the Architect completes his substantial completion walk-thru and determines the building is not substantially complete the contractor will be responsible for compensating the Architect for his time and expenses for a return visit.

01330 - SUBMITTALS

Each subcontractor shall submit shop drawing samples and/or product data for each major product/component to be installed under the respective category of work.

Shop drawings/submittals shall be submitted in digital PDF format and shall be returned in PDF format, reviewed in accordance with the General Conditions, indicating action taken.

Processing: Allow one (1) week review for initial review. Allow more time if processing must be delayed for coordination with other submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor when a submittal must be delayed for coordination. Allow one (1) week for reprocessing each submittal. If more than two reviews are necessary for a single submittal the time for the subsequent reviews shall be additional services and this cost may be passed onto the Contractor.

Work installed without proper submittal processing and noncomplying work may be rejected by the Architect, resulting in removal and replacement at sole cost to the Contractor.

01400 - QUALITY CONTROL

Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor is responsible for performing allll cross-reference the various disciplines' plans herein and reviewed shop drawings prior to starting construction/phase of construction and shall report any discrepancies to the Architect immediately.

Only contract documents approved for construction and reviewed shop drawings shall be used for construction. General Contractor shall be responsible for distribution of said documents and updates to the field for construction.

It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to coordinate the subcontractor work with these project documents.

Reference civil drawings for site work, including the building location on the site.

No products containing asbestos shall be installed in, or used during the construction of this project. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to certify to the Owner that this requirement has been complied with.

Dimensions are to the finish or center of objects.

DO NOT scale drawings.

The word "align" as used in these documents shall supersede dimensional information.

Code Compliance - The Work shall be governed by all applicable local, city, state and national laws and codes. These authorities include, but are not limited to, the National Electric Code, the American Concrete Institute, National Fire Protection Association, or any other authority of body having jurisdiction over Work. The building and parking lot shall comply with the ADA regulation (Accessibility for Handicapped).

01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES

All temporary facilities shall comply with applicable laws and regulations set forth by the Governing Agency.

01635 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

No product substitutions are permitted without the express written permission of the Architect.

01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. The Architect and Owner shall review and if needed add to this list prior to occupying the building. If earlier occupancy is required then the Architect, Owner, and Contractor shall agree to punch list procedures prior to occupancy.

The contractor shall have 15 business days to address and correct all punch list items. The owner reserves the right to withhold up to 10% retention as long punch list items remain outstanding.

After the project is substantially complete, the Contractor shall submit to the owner all required warranties and operation / maintenance manuals.

One set of final record documents and a copy of all shop drawings and submittals shall also be provided to the Owner by the Contractor.

The contractor shall submit HVAC balancing reports to the owner.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS (Not Used on Concrete with MVRA)A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to

fresh concrete.B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALSA. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURESA. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.B. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.453. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)

nominal maximum aggregate size.

2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENTA. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.10 CONCRETE MIXINGA. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M,

and furnish batch ticket information.1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORKA. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,

static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMSA. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is

attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDERSA. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643

and manufacturer's written instructions.1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.2. Flash vapor retarder up perimeter walls to top of floor slab, seal to foundation wall as

recommended by the manufacturer.3. Flash vapor retarder up around all electrical conduit, sanitary piping, and other penetrations

to top of floor slab and tape with manufacturer's recommended tape. All groupings of piping may be flashed as one continuous boot flashing as long as the distance between individual pipes does not exceed 1-inch.

4. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of reinforcing, or concrete with vapor barrier material or as instructed by manufacturer. Lay beyond damaged area a minimum of 6-inches and seal as prescribed for sheet joints.

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A003SPECIFICATIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTARA. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry

Assemblies."B. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.2. Fill collar joints solid as units are set.3. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.4. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive

sealant.5. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

E. Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.2 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTSA. Set cast stone units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned.

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments to secure units in place.2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories.

B. Fill anchor holes with sealant. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels.

C. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.

D. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored.

E. Prepare joints and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCESA. Match those indicated in Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry Assemblies”

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved

Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.1. Replace units in a manner that shows no evidence of replacement.

B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.

C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."


SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

See the Structural drawings for additional information under this section.

PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).2. Face brick

B. See Structural drawings for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry.C. See Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed

in masonry joints for metal flashing.D. See Division 4 Section "Cast Stone" for all cast stone units and installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing

bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.C. Samples for each type and color of exposed masonry units and colored mortars.D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 67.2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140.3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780.4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019.

B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes

approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high.C. Protection of Work:

1. Cover top of wall or partially completed work with waterproof membrane at end of each day until such time as the top of the wall is protected with the permanent roof membrane or coping material.

2. Extend cover 24-inches minimum down both sides and hold securely in place.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or

frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements specifided on the drawings.

2.2 COLORS, TEXTURES, AND PATTERNSA. Exposed Masonry Units: As indicated on drawings.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)A. Shapes: Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions.B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent

admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units and where indicated.1. Products:

a. Addiment Incorporated; Block Plus W-10.b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.c. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheopel.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.1. Unit Compressive Strength: As indicated on Structural drawings.2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.3. Pattern and Texture for Decorative Units:

a. Standard Pattern, Split-Face Finish

2.4 FACE BRICKA. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. For ends of sills & caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units w/ cores or frogs & w/ exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, & texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBX.1. Unit compressive strength: Provide units w/ min. average net area compressive strength of

3000 psi.2. Initial rate of absorption: less than 30g / 30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.3. Effloresence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not

efflorescent".4. Size (actual dimensions): 4" closure - 3 5/8" wide by 3 5/8" high by 7 5/8" long.5. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.6. Color and texture: As selected by architect (see drawings).7. Products: See drawings.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALSA. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where

indicated, complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."1. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into

wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated:2. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer,

complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.a. Products:

1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.

2) Firestone Building Products; FlashGuard.3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.

C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIESA. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible

up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene.B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with

ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following, unless otherwise indicated:1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by

38 by 89 mm) long.a. Products:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.5) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.1. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep.

b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar.

2. Products:a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

2.11 MASONRY CLEANERSA. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXESA. General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to portland

cement and lime.3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.

1. See structural drawings for additional information regarding Mortar for Unit Masonry.C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.1. See structural drawings for additional information regarding Grout for Unit Masonry.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLSA. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,

beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTINGA. Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar

to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness, unless otherwise indicated.D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint),

unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENTA. General: Install in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2

inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERSA. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply

with the following:1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in width between masonry and

structural member, unless otherwise indicated.2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and

attached to structure.3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36

inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTSA. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other

obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated on the drawings.

B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture

flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

E. Install end dams at all wall terminations, masonry openings, and steps in flashing elevations.

3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATIONA. Refer to Structural drawings for requirements under this section.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

B. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.C. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67.D. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for

mortar air content and compressive strength.F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.

3.13 CLEANINGA. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar

fins and smears before tooling joints.B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing

surfaces thoroughly with clear water.4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written

instructions.5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to

type of stain on exposed surfaces.


05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

Reference structural drawings for requirements for the work under this section.

05220 - STEEL JOISTS


05310 - STEEL DECK


05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING


05440 - COLD FORMED METAL TRUSSES


3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENTA. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

3.5 JOINTSA. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by Architect.C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete

into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each

edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENTA. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is

complete and that required inspections have been performed.B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.E. Add MVRA in accordance with manufacturer's printed data sheet instructions: For mix designs

ranging from 0.42 to 0.52 w/cm, dose at 14 ounces per 100 pounds (414ml/45kg) of total cementitious materials. Remove an equal amount of water from the mix. Add separately from other admixtures at the tail end of the load. Mix designs below 0.42 and above 0.52 may require adjustment and consultation with MVRA manufacturer is required prior to their use.1. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete with MVRA according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M; furnish batch ticket information showing dosage of MVRA.2. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M. Add the MVRA to where it makes direct contact with the ready mix and then rotate drum of batch truck on high for at least seven minutes prior to discharge.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACESA. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be

covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABSA. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing

operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or

inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,

carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURINGA. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRSA. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and

replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.1. The manufacturer of the moisture vapor reduction admixture will, at their expense, engage

qualified agencies to obtain project specific sample cylinders and independent certified laboratories for subsequent testing per ASTM D5084 and preparation of test reports.

B. Testing of Slabs Containing MVRA: 1. The moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) manufacturer will perform all moisture

testing in accordance with this specification and will issue project specific warranties and adhesion guarantees prior to installation of any slab finishes; no further field slab moisture nor pH testing shall be required.a. Failure to provide a product that meets or exceeds these requirements will result in

all subsequent testing and slab remediation costs being borne by the contractor.2. A representative or agent of the moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) manufacturer

must be present at the jobsite during placement of all MVRA treated concrete. a. Do not proceed without this representative being present.b. A minimum of one business day notification is required.

3. Field testing technician shall, at the expense of the MVRA Manufacturer, procure at least one 4 inch (102 mm) cylinder from every day of placement of MVRA dosed concrete for the purpose of subsequent hydraulic conductivity/coefficient of permeability testing.

4. All cylinders shall be independently lab tested in accordance with ASTM D 5084 at the expense of the MVRA manufacturer.

5. Test results must conform to specified limits.a. Should any cylinder from any day of placement deliver results in excess of 6.0 E-08 cm/sec,

the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer shall procure, at their expense, a core (or cores) from that day of placement. This core (cores) shall be sent to an independent laboratory for hydraulic conductivity (coefficient or permeability) per ASTM D 5084.

b. Should any core deliver results in excess of 6.0 E-08 cm/sec per ASTM D 5084, the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer shall provide, at their expense,

a topical moisture mitigation system for all areas not meeting the stated limit.6. Proceeding with placement of concrete dosed with the MVRA without the required representation will result in the contractor bearing the cost to core and ship appropriate material for testing per ASTM D

5084.


SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. This Section includes the following:

1. Cast stone trim.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Include dimensions of individual components.B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions,

details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.C. Samples: For each color and texture of cast stone required.D. Colored Mortar Samples: For each mortar color required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Architectural Art Stone, Inc..2. Architectural Cast Stone, Inc.3. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc.4. Custom Cast Stone, Inc.

2.2 CAST STONE UNITSA. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast

method.1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing.2. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.4. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cure units by one of the following methods:1. Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F (41 deg C) or

above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours.2. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100

percent relative humidity for 24 hours.C. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.D. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ACCESSORIESA. Anchors and Dowels: Type 304 stainless steelB. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner complying

with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" and approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.

2.4 MORTARA. Comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for mortar materials and

mixes.1. For setting mortar, use Type S.2. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with

other ingredients to produce color required.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALSA. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather

construction.B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.C. Mortar Pigments: Iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

1. Products:a. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM

C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated1. Products:

a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick.b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.

G. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.1. Products:

a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite.b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block

Mortar Admixture.c. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheomix Rheopel.

H. Water: Potable.

2.6 REINFORCEMENTA. Reference the Structural drawings for information under this section.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORSA. Reference the Structural drawings for information under this section.

SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section Includes:

1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.

1.2 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following:

1. Abrasive nosings.2. Shop primer products.3. Handrail wall brackets.4. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes, and field joints.3. Include plan at each level.4. Indicate locations of anchors, weld plates, and blocking for attachment of wall-mounted handrails.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the State in which Project is located.B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs, and railings, including attachment to building construction.B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:First three subparagraphs below are based on the International Building Code (IBC); revise to suit Project and to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm).3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above.5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less.

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m).b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.2 METALSA. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.B. Steel Tubing for Railings: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed).C. Steel Pipe for Railings: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads.F. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

2.3 ABRASIVE NOSINGSA. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron or aluminum, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.

1. Configuration: Cross-hatched units, 3 inches (75 mm) wide without lip.B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer.C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete.D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.

2.4 FASTENERSA. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941/F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls.

1. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.Retain "Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction" Paragraph below if railings are specified in this Section.B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.If retaining "Post-Installed Anchors" Paragraph below, indicate loads on Drawings and verify safety factors with Project's structural engineer.C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.Material in "Material for Interior Locations" Subparagraph below protects against corrosion in an indoor atmosphere.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941/F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Handrail Wall Brackets: Cast aluminum center of rail 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) from face of wall.B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Comply with SSPC-Paint 20, Type I-A Level 1, and compatible with topcoat.D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.E. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout; recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior use; noncorrosive and nonstaining; mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.Retain "Prefilled Concrete Treads" Paragraph below if required. Verify availability with manufacturers.F. Concrete Treads:

1. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) and maximum aggregate size of 1/2 inch (13 mm) unless otherwise indicated.2. Reinforcement Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening welded-wire reinforcement in place.

a. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete.

3. For galvanized reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERALA. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Assemble stairs and railings in shop to greatest extent possible.1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately.1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated.2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.F. Weld connections to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #2 - Completely sanded joint with some undercutting and pinholes okay.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible.

1. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated.2. Locate joints where least conspicuous.3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.4. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally.

2.7 FABRICATION OF STEEL-FRAMED STAIRSA. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for Commercial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers steel channels.a. Stringer Size: As required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.b. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube stringers.c. Finish: Shop primed.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel or rectangular tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube framing.b. Finish: Shop primed.

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below.

a. Locate hanger rods and struts where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm).Retain first subparagraph below for exterior stairs. Revise to included interior stairs when applicable.

1. Fabricate treads and landing subplatforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.2. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.3. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.4. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting.5. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.6. Attach abrasive nosings to risers.7. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication.8. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to produce smooth soffits.

2.8 FABRICATION OF STAIR RAILINGSA. Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of member, post spacings, wall bracket spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

1. Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square posts.2. Picket Infill: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square pickets spaced less than 4 inches (100 mm) clear.3. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square intermediate rails spaced less than 21 inches (533 mm) clear.

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections.1. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water.

a. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally.2. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose.3. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.5. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.6. Remove flux immediately.7. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #2 -Completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes are okay as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.

C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:1. By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.

D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work.

1. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.2. Provide ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.3. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports.

1. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.

2.9 FINISHESA. Finish metal stairs after assembly.B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated, ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRSA. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction.

1. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

1. Grouted Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates.

a. Clean bottom surface of plates.b. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts.c. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.d. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.e. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.1) Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.2) Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.2. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.3. Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

F. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Concrete treads to receive a smooth troweled finish.2. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete.3. Center nosings on tread width.

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGSA. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints with tight, hairline joints.

1. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads.2. Plumb posts in each direction, within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).4. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:

a. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members.b. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with post-installed anchors and bolts.

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.2. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements.

3.3 REPAIRA. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.


DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A004SPECIFICATIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275)]; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT.b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.; Grace Ice and Water Shield HTc. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.d. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Ultra SA.e. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.f. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment.g. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Deck Guard HT.h. Protecto Wrap Company; Protecto Jiffy Seal Ice & Water Guard HT.i. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade SA-HT.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or higher.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) or lower.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant

unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.3. Include identification of finish for each item.4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.B. Product test reports.C. Sample warranty.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Retain subparagraph below if copings or roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested are required.

1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm) thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard

D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/2 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

2.7 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install fully adhered roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.

D. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.3 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

B. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

E. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet.2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

F. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each

type of substrate indicated.B. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to

provide water-/weather-resistive barrier.C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed

water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details.

D. Trim: Apply trim accessories at locations indicated on Drawings.E. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach to substrate.F. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, where

expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; and where wall height changes.

G. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapes in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) dry-coat thickness.

H. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.1. Standard-impact reinforcing mesh unless otherwise indicated

I. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of standard impact reinforcing mesh.

J. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh.

K. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations.1. Texture: Match Architect's samples


SECTION 07272 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-permeable membrane air barriers.1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.

1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by manufacturer.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

2.2 VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIERGenerally retain this article for a membrane air barrier located on the cold side of primary wall insulation. A separate vapor retarder may also be required at a different location within the wall. These membranes are materials with an installed dry film thickness of about 40 mils (1.0 mm) and thicker.

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous membrane.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:a. Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane:

1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash Liquid VP.2) EIFS Air Barrier will be accepted behind stone.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.002 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.

pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 5.5 perms (320 ng/Pa x s x sq. m);

ASTM E 96/E 96M.c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-

barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.B. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam

sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft (24- to 32-kg/cu. m) density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

C. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATIONA. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting

other construction.B. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes,

and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.C. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.D. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and

edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install fluid-applied membrane air-barrier and accessory materials according to air-barrier

manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier.1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base

flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.2. Install air-barrier assembly on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3

inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate.B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be

covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to

achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier,

concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air barrier to substrate with termination mastic.E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts,

and doors. Apply transitions and flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm) of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of full contact.

F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.

G. Seal air-barrier assembly around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic.

H. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier.I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal

counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters.

Extend patches 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas.K. Fluid-Applied Membrane Material: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates

according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in

writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil (1.0-mm) dry film thickness applied in two equal coats.

L. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.M. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair

substrates and reapply air-barrier components.


SECTION 07543 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.2. Roof insulation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color required.2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.


A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.2. Firestone Building Products.3. GAF Materials Corporation.4. GenFlex Roofing Systems.5. Johns Manville.6. Versico Incorporated.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 TPO ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.

1. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.2. Exposed Face Color: As selected by Architect. (See drawings.)

3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATIONA. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written

instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated.1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to

surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.D. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation

anchors as follows:1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according

to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation.

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.

E. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.1. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames,

spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension

indicated between insulation and glass.2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent insulation

from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system.F. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.

Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATIONA. Install 3-inch- (76-mm-) thick, unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings at

partitions in a width that extends insulation 48 inches (1219 mm) on either side of partition.3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.

E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.


SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATIONPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill).2. Concealed building insulation.3. Exposed building insulation.4. Sound attenuation insulation.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test

performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or

delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity.

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Product test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of fire-resistance characteristic specified

for each product in Part 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product

selection:1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m), with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:1. Available Manufacturers:

a. DiversiFoam Products.b. Dow Chemical Company.c. Owens Corning.d. Pactiv Building Products Division.

B. Fabric-Faced, Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, Type VI, with a density of 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m), faced with insulation manufacturer's standard nonwoven filtration fabric and fabricated with 1 side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels.1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Owens Corning.b. T. Clear Corporation.

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATIONA. Available Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation.2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.3. Johns Manville.4. Knauf Fiber Glass.5. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.

D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:1. 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F

(1.9 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C)2. 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75

deg F (3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).3. 10 inches (254 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 30 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F

(5.2 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).

SECTION 07243 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over water-

resistive coating over sheathing.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Class PB EIFS: Physical properties and structural performance that comply with ICC-ES AC235

1. Drainage: According to ICC-ES AC24

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.B. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details,

penetrations, terminations, joints, fasteners, and attachments to other work.C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; "Outsulation Plus"2. Parex, Inc.; a brand of ParexLahabra, Inc.; system equal to Dryvit "Outsulation Plus"3. Senergy; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.; system equal to Dryvit "Outsulation Plus"4. Sto Corp.; system equal to Dryvit "Outsulation Plus"

2.2 MATERIALSA. Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing

meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.

B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of ICC-ES AC209

C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.

D. Insulation Adhesive: Standard formulationE. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS

manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board."1. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following:1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m)2. Intermediate-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 12.0 oz./sq. yd. (407 g/sq. m)3. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 15 oz./sq. yd. (509 g/sq. m)4. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd. (678 g/sq. m)5. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m)6. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m)7. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. (244 g/sq. m)

G. Base-Coat Materials: Standard formulationH. Primer: Factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer.I. Finish-Coat Materials: Factory-mixed, standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced mildew

resistance1. Colors: Match Architect's samples.

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRYPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Framing with dimension lumber.2. Framing with engineered wood products.3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.4. Wood blocking and nailers.5. Wood furring and grounds.6. Plywood backing panels.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design

stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBERA. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of

Review.D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMINGA. Maximum Moisture Content: Refer to Structural drawings for these requirements.B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species.C. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Refer to Structural drawings for these

requirements.2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Structural drawings for these requirements.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBERA. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:1. Blocking.2. Nailers.3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.4. Furring.5. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELSA. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged in

thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified.1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with

ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS (IF THERE IS NOT ANY STRUCTURAL LUMBER PLEASE DELETE THIS SECTION)

A. Refer to Structural drawings for these requirements.2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.


2.4 VAPOR RETARDERSA. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film

laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 lb/1000 sq. ft. (10 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.1317 perm (7.56 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) and with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60, respectively. Used in lieu of a faced insulation product in exterior walls.1. Available Products:a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 2FR.b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR.

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.

2.6 INSULATION FASTENERSA. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate formed from perforated galvanized carbon-steel

sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square, welded to projecting copper-coated steel spindle 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter and of length capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square or diameter self-locking washers complying with the following requirements:1. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-)

thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness.2. Where anchors are located in ceiling plenums, crawlspaces, or attic spaces, protect ends

with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap.

B. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1 inch (25 mm) between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.

C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATIONA. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior

grade line.B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions.

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A005SPECIFICATIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel or metallic-coated steel sheet for exterior units.1. Locations: Wall and ceiling.2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal.3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) wide,

surface- mounted trim.4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type5. Lock: Cylinder.

2.3 FABRICATIONA. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for

installation.B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces

without blemishes.C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish

attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.


SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS


A. Section Includes:1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following

performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story

drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing.d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.f. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Wind Loads: As indicated on the Structural Drawings.D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller

E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems,

including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

2. Test Durations: 10 seconds.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULEA. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces

1. Joint Locations:a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units.d. Joints in stone paving unitse. Joints between different materials listed above.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane.3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surface.1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.d. Joints in dimension stone cladding.e. Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies.f. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.g. Joints between metal panels.h. Joints between different materials listed above.i. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers.j. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.k. Other joints as indicated.


C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring.d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.e. Other joints as indicated.


D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

1. Joint Sealant Location:a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone.3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated.b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range


SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES


A. This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.C. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to

installation.

1.3 COORDINATIONA. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to

concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 STEEL MATERIALS

A. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating.

C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.1. Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.

D. Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.E. Plaster Beads: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet with flange of expanded metal lath.F. Manufacturer's standard finish.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGSA. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co.2. Jensen Industries.3. J. L. Industries, Inc.4. Karp Associates, Inc.5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.6. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Silicone joint sealants.2. Urethane joint sealants.3. Acoustical joint sealants.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Product test reports.B. Warranties.

1.4 WARRANTYA. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERALA. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTSA. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:a. Tremco Incorporated - Tremsil 200b. Or approved equal.

2. Type: Single component (S) with Fungicide3. Grade: nonsag (NS).4. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTSA. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:a. Tremco Incorporated - Dymeric 240 b. Or approved equal

2. Type: multicomponent (M).3. Grade: nonsag (NS).4. Class: 50.5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T) or Nontraffic (NT).

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTSA. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:a. Tremco Incorporatedb. Or approved equal

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKINGA. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. AES Industries, Inc.b. Curbs Plus, Inc.c. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.d. Greenheck Fan Corporation.e. LM Curbs.f. Metallic Products Corp.g. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.h. Pate Company (The).i. Roof Products, Inc.j. Safe Air of Illinois.k. Thybar Corporation.l. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch (1.32 mm) thick.1. Finish: Mill phosphatized

C. Construction: Retain first subparagraph below if required.1. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick glass-fiber board insulation.2. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.3. Factory-installed wood nailer at top of curb, continuous around curb perimeter.4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 14 inches unless otherwise indicated.6. Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping the deck-mounting flange.7. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Seal joints with sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizingaccording to ASTM A 780.B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09912 "Interior Painting."C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Roof curbs.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items.B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.1. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm).

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.C. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.D. Sealants: As recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated.

2.3 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb unitscapable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

Retain formed items required in this article. Although the most common fabrications are included, insert descriptions of others if required.

A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates.Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.

b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Fabricate from the Following Materials:a. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.

C. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or woodsubstrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate.C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm).F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.B. Clean off excess sealants.C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.


SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes hollow-metal work.

1.2 DEFINITIONSA. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Product test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


1. Amweld International, LLC.2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.4. Daybar.5. DKS Steel Door & Frame Sys. Inc.6. Gensteel Doors Inc.7. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.8. Mesker Door Inc.9. MPI Group, LLC (The).10. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.11. Steward Steel; Door Division.12. Titan Metal Products, Inc.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMESA. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At all interior doors unless noted otherwise..

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm).d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.e. Core: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Frames:a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMESA. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. At all exterior doors unless noted otherwise.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamlesse. Core: Polyisocyanurate

3. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.4. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.b. Construction: Full profile welded.

5. Exposed Finish: Prime

2.5 FRAME ANCHORSA. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 MATERIALSA. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).I. Glazing: Section 08800 "Glazing."J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

2.8 STEEL FINISHESA. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

2.9 ACCESSORIESA. Louvers: Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.

1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated.

B. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation.6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions.8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08800 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.


SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Pre-finished standard wood doors with flush faces.2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.2. Eggers Industries.3. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.4. Lambton Doors.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTIONA. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.2. Extra Heavy Duty: public toilets and mechanical room.

B. 5-Ply Door Construction:1. Non-Fire Rated Doors: Thickness 1-3/4 inches, interior flush wood, bonded, solid core confirming to WDMA I.S.1-A and the following:a. Core: Bonded particle core IPC).

b. Stiles: Hardwood to match face veneer over structural composite lumber (SCL), glued to core.c. Rails: Mill option hardwood or SCL. Top and bottom: 2 inches before trim or factory fit.d. Facing: Wood veneer cut and specie as specified.

C. Wood Veneer:1. Minimum face veneer thickness shall be 1/50” at 12” moisture content after sanding.2. Species: Birch.3. Face Cut: Plain Sliced.4. Face Assembly: Book Match.5. Face Symmetry: Running Match.

D. Adhesives:1. Adhesives: Adhesives must be classified Type II per WDMA TM-6 “Adhesive Bond Test Method”.

E. Core:1. Non-rated and 20 minute doors: Solid particleboard.2. Fire-rated doors: Non-combustible mineral core containing no asbestos. Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

F. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 FABRICATIONA. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

2.4 FACTORY FINISHINGA. Comply with referenced WDMA Section G-15, “Factory Finishing” for Premium Grade factory finishing systems.B. Pre-finished wood doors at factory.C. Transparent Finish: Match finish indicated in WDMA Section G-17: WDMA System #6.D. Finish on wood doors to be custom color to match dark mahogany finish from HON furniture as provided by owner.

2.5 VISION FRAMESA. Non-rated doors: Flush wood frames, hardwood to match facing.B. 20 minute fire rated doors: Provide manufacturer's tested metal clip or comparable system with wood stop appearance.C. Glass: Refer to section 08800 for glass types.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.B. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, fire rating, swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jacks and level heads.C. Provide with installation only have unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.C. Handle doors in accordance with recommendations of WDMA I.S. 1-A, “Care and Handling at Job Site”.D. Condition door to average temperature and humidity in area of installation for not less than 48 hours prior to installation. Store doors per recommendations of WDMA I.S. 1-A, “Care and Handling at Job Site”.E. Install in neat and workmanlike manner, free from hammer or tool marks, open joints and slivers.F. Remove and replace all doors found to be warped, twisted, bowed, or otherwise damaged. Do not install doors which cannot be properly fitted to frames.G. Adjust prefinished doors and hardware and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.H. If doors are to be field finished, the process must allow WDMA I.S. 1-A, “Care and Handling at Job Site” instructions for field applied finishes.I. Ensure that smoke gaskets are in-place before prefinished door installation.

3.3 PROTECTIONA. Doors shall not be installed until they can be prevented from damage from other trades work.


DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A006SPECIFICATIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

2.2 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITSA. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. American Gypsum Co.b. G-P Gypsum.c. USG Corporation.

2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum.2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIESA. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.b. Bullnose bead.c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.f. Expansion (control) joint.g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALSA. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALSA. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERALA. Comply with ASTM C 840.B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARDA. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings.2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings.3. Flexible Type: As indicated on Drawings.4. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.5. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

3.3 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITSA. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.

1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIESA. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.B. Control Joints: Install control joints [according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges4. L-Bead: Use where indicated5. U-Bead: Use where indicated.6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARDA. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.F. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 4 - EXTERIOR WALL SHEATHING EXECUTION

4.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

B. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture.

C. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

4.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATIONA. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws.2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements.4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials.

4.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATIONA. General: When specified on plans cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as

follows:1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at

expansion- or control-joint locations.2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap, unless

otherwise indicated.B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

4.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENTA. When a weather-resistant building wrap is not called for on the plans at exterior sheathing the

contractor shall seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and

trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners. Seal other penetrations and openings.


SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.)

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERALA. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTSA. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm)

diameter.C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch

(1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm)

D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIESA. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on DrawingsB. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on DrawingsD. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-

(12.7-mm-) wide flanges.1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-)

thick, galvanized steel.E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-) wide flanges.1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel

thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall

attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALSA. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other

properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMSA. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads

within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms.5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

C. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm

in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALSA. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITSA. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

2.6 INSULATING-GLASS UNITSA. Solar-Control Low-E Insulating-Glass Units:

1. Available Products manufactured by:a. PPGb. Viraconc. Oldcastle Glass

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6.0 mm3. Interspace Content: Air or Argon.4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.

a. Annealed or Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated on drawings.b. Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface.

5. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.a. Annealed or Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated on drawings .

6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.7. Visible Light Transmittance: 69 percent minimum.8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.32 maximum.9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.32 maximum.10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.45 maximum.11. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 12 percent maximum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZINGA. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

B. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.


SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors.2. Glazed entrances.3. Storefront framing.

1.2 DEFINITIONSA. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float glass.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTSA. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.3. Sealing System: Dual seal.4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

a. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETSA. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene.2. EPDM.3. Silicone.4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.5. Any material indicated above.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIESA. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.5. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

C. Direct Furring:1. Screw to wood framing.2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.D. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.


SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Interior gypsum board.2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARDA. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.


a. American Gypsum Co.b. G-P Gypsum.c. USG Corporation.

B. Regular Type:1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).2. Long Edges: Tapered

C. Type X:1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).2. Long Edges: Tapered

D. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).2. Long Edges: Tapered.

E. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).2. Long Edges: Tapered.

F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWAREA. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. See hardware schedule on drawings for additional hardware requirements.

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products complying with BHMA standard referenced.

2. Opening-Force Requirements:a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than

30 lbf (133 N) to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open the door to its minimum required width.

b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door.B. Opening-Force Requirements:

1. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force of not more than 15 lbf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds.

2. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to release latch.C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leafD. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum

framing.E. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.F. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements

except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATIONA. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of

finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following

characteristics:1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior.4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances.6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent

possible.D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for

installing entrance door hardware.F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent

possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop

Drawings.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. As indicated on drawings


A. General:1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.2. Do not install damaged components.3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration.6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting

contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.


2.7 EXIT DEVICESA. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.E. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

1. Operation: Rigid F. Outside Trim: Pull with cylinder material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.G. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors.

2.8 LOCK CYLINDERSA. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Seven.C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; with interchangeable cores.D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.9 KEYINGA. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference into grand master key system.B. Keys: Nickel silver; permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and including the notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide three cylinder change keys and five grand master keys.

2.10 OPERATING TRIMA. Standard: BHMA A156.6.B. Materials: Fabricate from aluminum unless otherwise indicated.

2.11 CLOSERSA. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

1. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width.C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with fire alarm system.D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Match door hardware finish, unless otherwise indicated.E. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.F. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.G. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.

2.12 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITSA. Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets.B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from material indicated in door hardware sets.C. Plastic Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled 4 sides; fabricated from material indicated in door hardware sets.

2.13 STOPS AND HOLDERSA. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.

1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.

2.14 DOOR GASKETINGA. Standard: BHMA A156.22.B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

C. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.D. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

2.15 THRESHOLDSA. Standard: BHMA A156.21.B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) highC. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa)

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa)

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of

moisture in the system to the exterior.C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for

installation of units required for this Project.B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings,

based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

1.5 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:1. EFCO Corporation.2. Kawneer North America3. United States Aluminum.4. Vistawall Architectural Products

2.2 MATERIALSA. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMSA. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness

required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.1. Construction: Thermally broken2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides3. Glazing Plane: Center

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal

and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials

E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMSA. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of

profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMSA. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum

members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width

a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Commercial door hardware.B. See Division 8 door sections for astragals and door silencers.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, including wiring diagrams.C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame.2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer.4) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.4 COORDINATIONA. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

1.5 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWAREA. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products.

A. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

2.2 HINGES, GENERALA. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Exterior Hinges: Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads.2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin

C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors.D. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors and wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.3 HINGESA. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.

2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERALA. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.C. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors.D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.E. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHESA. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following:

1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series 4000.

2.6 DOOR BOLTSA. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors.B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.C. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; designed for mortising into door edge.D. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; designed for mortising into door edge.

2.16 FABRICATIONA. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications.C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6.B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."F. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.


DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A007SPECIFICATIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERSA. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ansul Fire Protection.2. J.L. Industries.3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 1-A:10-B:C, 2-1/2-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container.

2.03 MOUNTING BRACKETSA. Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of sized required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish.B. Provide brackets for extinguishers.Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with FIRE EXTINGUISHER in red letter decals.Use letter size, style, and location as selected by Architect.

2.04 QUANTITIESA. Provide a minimum of one (1) unit with a maximum travel distance of 75'-0" for placement. Provide additional units at the locations to be determined by the Fire Marshall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTIONA. Verify Mounting Locations:

1. Verify that mounting locations for bracket mounted fire extinguisher are correctly sited in correct linear location and are at the correct vertical mounting heights.2. Verify that all required exposed or concealed metal or wood blocking has been installed to support surface bracket mounted F.E. units.3. Start of installation indicates installer's and Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. Any conditions subsequently found to be unacceptable are to be reworked with no added cost or delays in completion.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Mount units as directed by local fire authorities, and in accordance with requirements of the Americans Disability Act.

1. The A.D.A. may require that the fire extinguishers scheduled for surface bracket mounting be receded or semi-recessed in columns and walls, so that the unit projections into the clear pathway does not exceed the allowable 4" maximum.

B. Mark units with paint or similar marking as required.C. Provide and install and Fire Marshall required graphic fire extinguisher signage indicating location of Fire Extinguishers.D. Finish wall surfacing material F.R.P. and Ceramic Tile are to lap behind the F.E. wall and column mounted F.E. brackets, and are to be installed prior to installing cabinets. Painted wall finishes may be applied to walls after cabinets and brackets are installed.E. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.F. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.

1. Fasten mounting brackets, square and plumb.

3.03 PROTECTIONA. Provide protection for installed fire extinguishers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.B. Provide protection for work before, during and after completion and unit Owner acceptance.C. Any units damaged that cannot be repaired, are to be removed and replaced at no extra cost to Owner or delays in completion.

3.04 ADJUST AND CLEANA. Final Cleanup

1. Perform final cleanup in accordance with Section 01710-Cleaning.2. Just prior to turn-over clean and rag polished all units.

B. Final Adjustments1. Perform all adjustments to fire extinguisher units including smooth operation of all locks, valves, etc. in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.05 MAINTENANCEA. Provide all required training and instruction for Owner's representative for access, operation, and storage of fire extinguisher units. Assist Tenant in scheduling any required fire department final inspections of fire extinguisher installation with Owner's representatives present.


SECTION 10526 - FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Lock box key vault for fire department emergency building access.2. Coordination and ordering requirements.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Pre-Installation Meetings: Meet with fire department to determine requirements for lock box type and coordinate exact location for installation and mounting of box on building with fire department and Architect.

PART 1 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Knox Box by The Knox Company, Irvine, CA Phone: (800) 552-5669 FAX: (949) 252-0482.B. Alternate Manufacturers: As approved by fire department.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITSA. Lock Box: UL labeled, weather resistant, factory finished, recessed, heavy duty steel lock box.B. Model: Type and size as required by fire department.C. Ordering: Complete manufacturer's Authorization/Order Form and obtain local fire department authorized signature on form before processing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install lock box at location required by fire department in accordance with manufacturers published instructions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERALA. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As indicated on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as

follows:1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants.C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller

tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an

undamaged condition.E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced

painted surfaces.

3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULEA. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealerb. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell)


SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORKA. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required for the installation of bracket mounted fire extinguishers as herein described.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.B. Product data and details showing mounting methods.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers from one source from a single manufacturer.B. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.C. FM-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher with FM marking.

SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint/sealer systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU).2. Steel.3. Galvanized metal.4. Exterior gypsum board.5. Thru-wall clay masonry units

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERALA. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.3. Wood: 15 percent.4. Plaster: 12 percent.5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.F. For elastomeric coatings on masonry or concrete the contractor shall patch and/or seal all cracks, crevices, through-wall openings, and voids in mortar with the paint manufacturers approved patching/sealing product.

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULEA. CMU Substrates:

1. High-Build Elastomeric Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2K, applied to form dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm).

a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.c. Topcoat: High-build latex (exterior).

B. Steel Substrates:1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss)

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A.

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss)

D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

E. Exterior concrete walks:1. Clear silicone acrylic System:

a. Prime Coat: Clear silicone acrylic based waterproof sealer.b. Topcoat: Clear silicone acrylic based waterproof sealer.


SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Gypsum board.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

SECTION 14241 MACHINE ROOM-LESS HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

• Section includes: Machine room-less hydraulic passenger elevators as shown and specified. Elevator work includes:• Standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators.• Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment.• Operation and control systems.• Jack(s).• Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons.• Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the

specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity.• Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation.

• Related Sections:• Division 1 General Requirements: Meet or exceed all referenced sustainability

requirements.• Division 3 Concrete: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete.• Division 5 Metals:

• Providing hoist beams, pit ladders, steel framing, auxiliary support steel and divider beams for supporting guide-rail brackets.

• Providing steel angle sill supports and grouting hoistway entrance sills and frames.

• Division 9 Finishes: Providing elevator car finish flooring and field painting unfinished and shop primed ferrous materials.

• Division 16 Sections:• Providing electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches

where permitted. (note: fused disconnect switch to be provided as part of elevator manufacture product, see section 2.11 Miscellaneous elevator components for further details.)

• Emergency power supply, transfer switch and auxiliary contacts.• Heat and smoke sensing devices.• Convenience outlets and illumination in control room (if applicable), hoistway and

pit.• Division 22 Plumbing

• Sump pit and oil interceptor.• Division 23 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning

1. Heating and ventilating hoistways and/or control room.• Work Not Included: General contractor shall provide the following in accordance with the

requirements of the Model Building Code and ANSI A17.1 Code. For specific rules, refer to ANSI A17.1, Part 3 for hydraulic elevators. State or local requirements must be used if more stringent. The cost of this work is not included in the thyssenkrupp Elevator’s proposal, since it is a part of the building construction.• Elevator hoist beam to be provided at top of elevator shaft. Beam must be able to

accommodate proper loads and clearances for elevator installation and operation.• Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates,

brackets, supports and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement.• Hatch walls require a minimum two hours of fire rating. Hoistway should be clear and

plumb with variations not to exceed 1/2'' at any point. • Elevator hoistways shall have barricades, as required.• Install bevel guards at 75° on all recesses, projections or setbacks over 2'' (4'' for A17.1

2000 areas) except for loading or unloading.• Provide rail bracket supports at pit, each floor and roof. For guide rail bracket supports,

provide divider beams between hoistway at each floor and roof. • Pit floor shall be level and free of debris. Reinforce dry pit to sustain normal vertical forces

from rails and buffers.• Where pit access is by means of the lowest hoistway entrance, a vertical ladder of non-

combustible material extending 42'' minimum, (48'' minimum for A17.1-2000 areas) shall be provided at the same height, above sill of access door or handgrips.

• All wire and conduit should run remote from the hoistways.• When heat, smoke or combustion sensing devices are required, connect to elevator

control cabinet terminals. Contacts on the sensors should be sided for 12 volt D.C.• Install and furnish finished flooring in elevator cab.• Finished floors and entrance walls are not to be constructed until after sills and door

frames are in place. Consult elevator contractor for rough opening size. The general contractor shall supply the drywall framing so that the wall fire resistance rating is maintained, when drywall construction is used.

• Where sheet rock or drywall construction is used for front walls, it shall be of sufficient strength to maintain the doors in true lateral alignment. Drywall contractor to coordinate with elevator contractor.

• Before erection of rough walls and doors; erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames. After rough walls are finished; erect fascias and toe guards. Set sill level and slightly above finished floor at landings.

• To maintain legal fire rating (masonry construction), door frames are to be anchored to walls and properly grouted in place.

•

• The elevator wall shall interface with the hoistway entrance assembly and be in strict compliance with the elevator contractor's requirements.

• General Contractor shall fill and grout around entrances, as required.• All walls and sill supports must be plumb where openings occur.• Locate a light fixture (200 lx / 19 fc) and convenience outlet in pit with switch located

adjacent to the access door. • Provide telephone line, light fixture (200 lx / 19 fc), and convenience outlet in the hoistway

at the landing where the elevator controller is located. Typically this will be at the landing above the 1st floor. Final location must be coordinated with elevator contractor.

• As indicated by elevator contractor, provide a light outlet for each elevator, in center of hoistway.

• For signal systems and power operated door: provide ground and branch wiring circuits. • For car light and fan: provide a feeder and branch wiring circuits to elevator control

cabinet.• Controller landing wall thickness must be a minimum of 8 inches thick. This is due to the

controller being mounted on the second floor landing in the door frame on the return side of the door. For center opening doors, the controller is located on the right hand frame (from inside the elevator cab looking out). These requirements must be coordinated between the general contractor and the elevator contractor.

• Cutting, patching and recesses to accommodate hall button boxes, signal fixtures, etc.. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

• Product data: When requested, the elevator contractor shall provide standard cab, entrance and signal fixture data to describe product for approval.

• • Shop drawings:

1. Show equipment arrangement in the corridor, pit, and hoistway and/or optional control room. Provide plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and equipment location.

2. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and other pertinent information.

3. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at points of support and all similar considerations of the elevator work.

4. Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device recommendations.

• Powder Coat paint selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection charts for exposed finishes and materials.

• • Plastic laminate selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection charts for exposed finishes

and materials.• • Metal Finishes: Upon request, standard metal samples provided.• • Operation and maintenance data. Include the following:

• Owner’s manuals and wiring diagrams.• Parts list, with recommended parts inventory.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE• Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer with minimum 15 years of experience in

manufacturing, installing, and servicing elevators of the type required for the project.• The manufacturer of machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators cabs, entrances,

and all other major parts of elevator operating equipment.• The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured by the installing

company, and not be an assembled system.• The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program.• ISO-9001:2000 Manufacturer Certified• ISO-14001:2004 Environmental Management System Certified• LEED Gold certified elevator manufacturing facility.

• Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer or an authorized agent of the manufacturer with not less than 15 years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and performance to the project elevators.

• • Regulatory Requirements:

1. ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by the local building code.

2. Building Code: National. 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.4. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.5. Americans with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)6. Section 407 in ICC A117.1, when required by local authorities7. CAN/CSA B44 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

• Fire-rated entrance assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware, and operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, UL10(b), and NFPA Standard 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1 1/2 hour label by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.

• • Inspection and testing:

1. Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, tests, permits and fees for elevator installation.

2. Arrange for inspections and make required tests.3. Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING• Manufacturing shall deliver elevator materials, components and equipment and the contractor is

responsible to provide secure and safe storage on job site.• PROJECT CONDITIONS

• Temporary Use: Elevators shall not be used for temporary service or for any other purpose during the construction period before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the purchaser unless agreed upon by Elevator Contractor and General Contractor with signed temporary agreement.

1.06 WARRANTY• Warranty: Submit elevator manufacturer's standard written warranty agreeing to repair, restore or

replace defects in elevator work materials and workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use or care for 12 months after final acceptance.

1.07 MAINTENANCE• Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 3 months for each elevator after

completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier, during normal working hours excluding callbacks.• Service shall consist of periodic examination of the equipment, adjustment, lubrication,

cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation. Maintenance work, including emergency call back repair service, shall be performed by trained employees of the elevator contractor during regular working hours.

• Submit parts catalog and show evidence of local parts inventory with complete list of recommended spare parts. Parts shall be produced by manufacturer of original equipment.

• Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel within a 100 mile radius of the project site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS• Manufacturer: Basis-of-Design is the Thyssen Krupp’s Endura Machine Room-Less hydraulic

elevator.• Approved Elevator Manufacturers:

• Kone• Otis• Schindler• Thyssen Krupp

2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL• All Elevator Cab materials including frame, buttons, lighting, wall and ceiling assembly, laminates

and carpet shall have an EPD and an HPD.• • Colors, patterns, and finishes: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of

standard colors, patterns, and finishes.• • Steel:

1. Shapes and bars: Carbon.2. Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish.3. Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel for structural parts, powder coat for architectural

parts. Color selection must be based on elevator manufacture’s standard selections.•

• Plastic laminate: Decorative high-pressure type, complying with NEMA LD3, Type GP-50 General Purpose Grade, nominal 0.050" thickness. Laminate selection must be based on elevator manufacture’s standard selections.

• • Flooring by others.

2.03 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT• Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a

wood sub-floor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed. The car platform shall be designed and fabricated to support one-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity.

• • Sling: Steel stiles bolted or welded to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to

remove strain from the car enclosure.• • Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets.• • Guides: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car.• • Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on continuous channels

fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project conditions.

• • Jack: A jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test jack

to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohibited in the jack construction. Provide the following jack type: Twin post holeless telescopic 2-stage. Two jacks piped together, mounted one on each side of the car with each having two telescopic sections designed to extend in a synchronized manner when oil is pumped into the assembly. Each jack section will be guided from within the casing or the plunger assembly used to house the section. Each plunger shall have a high pressure sealing system which will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. Each jack assembly shall have a check valve built into the assembly to allow for automatically re-syncing the two plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. The jack shall be designed to be mounted on the pit floor or in a recess in the pit floor. Each jack section shall have a bleeder valve to discharge any air trapped in the section..

• • Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically

bring the car to the floor landings and correct for over travel or under travel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load.

• • Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National

Electrical Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the power unit to the jack unit. theoiltype

• • Pit moisture/water sensor located approximately 1 foot above the pit floor to be provided. Once

activated, elevator will perform “flooded pit operation”, which will run the car up to the designated floor, cycle the doors and shut down and trip the circuit breaker shunt to remove 3 phase power from all equipment, including pit equipment.

• • Motorized oil line shut-off valve shall be provided that can be remotely operated from the controller

landing service panel. Also a means for manual operation at the valve in the pit is required.2.04 POWER UNIT

• Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): A self-contained unit located in the elevator pit consisting of the following items:1. NEMA 4/Sealed Oil reservoir with tank cover including vapor removing tank breather2. An oil hydraulic pump.3. An electric motor.4. Electronic oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high

pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and electro-magnetic controlling solenoids.

• Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and quiet operation. Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator car.

• Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Duty rating – motors shall be capable of 80 starts per hour with a 30% motor run time during each start.

• Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be made without removing the assembly from the oil line.• Relief valve shall be adjustable and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without

increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve.

• Up start and stop valve shall be adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops.

• Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow.

• Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be adjustable for down start speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" starts and stops. The leveling valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling after slowdown is initiated.

• Provided with constant speed regulation in both up and down direction. Feature to compensate for load changes, oil temperature, and viscosity changes.

• Solid State Starting: Provide an electronic starter featuring adjustable starting currents.• A secondary hydraulic power source (powered by 110VAC single phase) must be

provided. This is required to be able to raise (reposition) the elevator in the event of a system component failure (i.e. pump motor, starter, etc.)

• Oil Type: Provide a zinc free, inherently biodegradable lubricant formulated with premium base stocks to provide outstanding protection for demanding hydraulic systems, especially those operating in environmentally sensitive areas.

2.05 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES• Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway

opening bolted\knock down construction.• Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger supports,

hanger covers, fascia plates (where required), sight guards, and necessary hardware. • Main landing door & frame finish: Stainless steel panels, no. 4 brushed finish.• Typical door & frame finish: Stainless steel panels, No. 4 brushed finish.

• Integrated Control System: the elevator controller to be mounted to hoistway entrance above 1st landing. The entrance at this level, shall be designed to accommodate the control system and provide a means of access to critical electrical components and troubleshooting features. See section 2.09 Control System for additional requirements.

• At the controller landing, the hoistway entrance frame shall have space to accommodate and provide a lockable means of access (group 2 security) to a 3 phase circuit breaker. See section 2.11 Miscellaneous Elevator Components for further details

• Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code.

• Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway horizontal sliding door.1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease.2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors

during operation.3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger

sheaves.• Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on aluminum.

2.06 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURE• Car Enclosure:

• Walls: Cab type a laminate wall design, durable wood core finished on both sides with high pressure plastic laminate.

• Reveals and frieze: Not applicable• Canopy: Cold-rolled steel with hinged exit.• Ceiling: Suspended type, LED lighting with translucent diffuser mounted in a metal

frame. Framework shall be finished with a factory applied powder coat finish.• Cab Fronts, Return, Transom, Soffit and Strike: Provide panels faced with No. 4 brushed

stainless steel• Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang doors on

sheave type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel track and are guided at the bottom by non-metallic sliding guides.• Door Finish: Stainless steel panels: No. 4 brushed finish.• Cab Sills: Extruded aluminum, mill finish.

• Handrail: Provide 2'' flat metal bar on side and rear walls on front opening cars and side walls only on front and rear opening cars. Handrails shall have a stainless steel, No. 4 brushed finish.

• Ventilation: Manufacturer’s standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top.• Protection pads and buttons: Provide one set of vinyl protection pads with metal grommets

for the project. Provide pad buttons on cab front(s) and walls.•

• Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an “Auto-Inspection” switch, an "emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station shall give the inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly.

2.07 DOOR OPERATION• Door Operation: Provide a direct or alternating current motor driven heavy duty operator designed

to operate the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. The door control system shall be digital closed loop and the closed loop circuit shall give constant feedback on the position and velocity of the elevator door. The motor torque shall be constantly adjusted to maintain the correct door speed based on its position and load. All adjustments and setup shall be through the computer based service tool. Door movements shall follow a field programmable speed pattern with smooth acceleration and deceleration at the ends of travel. The mechanical door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. AC controlled units with oil checks, or other deviations are not acceptable.1. No Un-Necessary Door Operation: The car door shall open only if the car is stopping for a

car or hall call, answering a car or hall call at the present position or selected as a dispatch car.

2. Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no coincident hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated.

3. Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel shall reverse and the door shall reopen to answer the other call.

4. Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door closing is prevented for a field programmable time, a buzzer shall sound. When the obstruction is removed, the door shall begin to close at reduced speed. If the infra-red door protection system detects a person or object while closing on nudging, the doors shall stop and resume closing only after the obstruction has been removed.

5. Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and the infra-red beam(s) is interrupted, the doors shall reverse and reopen. After the obstruction is cleared, the doors shall begin to close.

6. Door Open Watchdog: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field adjustable time, the doors shall recycle closed then attempt to open six times to try and correct the fault.

7. Door Close Watchdog: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field adjustable time, the doors shall recycle open then attempt to close six times to try and correct the fault.

8. Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode, the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to close.

• Door Protection Device: Provide a door protection system using microprocessor controlled infra-red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a passenger or object. If door movement is obstructed, the doors shall immediately reopen.

• 2.08 CAR OPERATING STATION

• Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices required for specific operation mounted in an integral swing return panel requiring no applied faceplate. Wrap return shall have a No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements. Pushbuttons that illuminate using long lasting LED’s shall be included for each floor served, and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. Switches for car light and accessories shall be provided.

• • Emergency Communications System: Integral phone system provided.• • Auxiliary Operating Panel: Not Required• • Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator cab and

located in the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel. The lantern will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop. The lantern shall remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to close.

• • Special Equipment: Not Applicable•

2.09 CONTROL SYSTEMS• Controller: Shall be integrated in a hoistway entrance jamb. Should be microprocessor based,

software oriented and protected from environmental extremes and excessive vibrations in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Control of the elevator shall be automatic in operation by means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for registering car stops, and by "up-down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and "call" push buttons at terminal landings.

• • Service Panel – to be located outside the hoistway in the controller entrance jamb and shall provide

the following functionality/features:1. Access to main control board and CPU2. Main controller diagnostics3. Main controller fuses4. Universal Interface Tool (UIT)5. Remote valve adjustment6. Electronic motor starter adjustment and diagnostics7. Operation of pit motorized shut-off valve with LED feedback to the state of the valve in the

pit8. Operation of auxiliary pump/motor (secondary hydraulic power source)9. Operation of electrical assisted manual lowering10. Provide male plug to supply 110VAC into the controller11. Run/Stop button

• Automatic Light and Fan shut down: The control system shall evaluate the system activity and automatically turn off the cab lighting and ventilation fan during periods of inactivity. The settings shall be field programmable.

• • Emergency Power Operation: (Battery Lowering 10-DOC) When the loss of normal power is

detected, a battery lowering feature is to be activated. The elevator will lower to a predetermined level and open the doors. After passengers have exited the car, the doors will close and the car will shutdown. When normal power becomes available, the elevator will automatically resume operation. The battery lowering feature is included in the elevator contract and does not utilize a building-supplied standby power source.

• Special Operation: Not Applicable2.10 HALL STATIONS

• Hall Stations, General: Buttons shall illuminate to indicate call has been registered at that floor for the indicated direction.• Provide one pushbutton riser with faceplates having a No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish.

• Phase 1 firefighter’s service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into the hall station at the designated level.

• Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

• • Hall Position Indicator: An electronic dot matrix position indicator shall be provided and mounted for

optimum viewing. As the car travels, its position in the hoistway shall be indicated by the illumination of the alphanumeric character corresponding to the landing which the elevator is stopped or passing. When hall lanterns are provided, the position indicator shall be combined with the hall lanterns in the same faceplate. Faceplates shall match hall stations.Provide at all typical landings.

• Hall lanterns: Not Applicable• Special Equipment: Not Applicable•

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ELEVATOR COMPONENTS• Oil Hydraulic Silencer: Install multiple oil hydraulic silencers (muffler device) at the power unit

location. The silencers shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof housing.

• Lockable three phase circuit breaker with auxiliary contact with shunt trip capability to be provided. Circuit breaker to be located behind locked panel (Group 2 security access) at controller landing entrance jamb and should be sized according to the National Electrical Code.

• Lockable single phase 110V circuit breaker for cab light and fan to be provided. Circuit breaker to be located behind locked panel (Group 2 security access) at controller landing entrance jamb should be sized according to the National Electrical Code

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION• Before starting elevator installation, inspect hoistway, hoistway openings, pits and/or control room,

as constructed, verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

• • Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory

performance.•

3.02 INSTALLATION• Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction.

• Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1, manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

• Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation.• Perform work with competent, skilled workmen under the direct control and supervision of the

elevator manufacturer's experienced foreman.• Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets,

supports, and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement.• Welded construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted

connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualification of welding operators.

• Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor, to ensure dimensional coordination of the work.

• Install machinery, guides, controls, car and all equipment and accessories to provide a quiet, smoothly operating installation, free from side sway, oscillation or vibration.

• Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at each landing.

• Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erection of rough walls and doors; erect fascia and toe guards after rough walls finished. Set sill units accurately aligned and slightly above finish floor at landings.

• Lubricate operating parts of system, where recommended by manufacturer.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL• Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use of

elevator, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by Code and governing regulations or agencies. Perform other tests, if any, as required by governing regulations or agencies.

• • Advise Owner, Contractor, Architect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and times tests

are to be performed on the elevator.•

3.04 ADJUSTING• Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates

smoothly and accurately.•

3.05 CLEANINGBefore final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided. Stainless steel shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive su

JAMB

HEAD

SILENCERS

JAMB ANCHORS, 3 PER JAMB

PTD. HM. FRAME

PART. TYPE AS SCHED.

WHERE WALL OCCURS

DOOR AS SCHED.

PTD. HM. FRAME

PART. TYPE AS SCHED.

DOOR, AS SCHED.

4" MIN.

2" 5/8"

5/8"

2"

1/2"

METAL THRESHOLD W/ THERMAL BREAK. SET ENTIRE PERMIETER OFTHRESHOLD IN HEAVY BEAD OF DOW-CORNING 756 CAULK

1/2" PREMOLDED COMPRESSIBLEFILLER W/ SEALANT

STOREFRONT OR HOLLOWMTL. DOOR - SEE SCHED.

1/2"

CONC. SLAB

FINISH FLOOR100' - 0"

T.O. STONE102' - 8"

2' - 3

1/2"

8' - 0

"

R 11' - 0"

2' - 4" 6' - 0" 2' - 4"10' - 8"

10' -

3 1/2"

1008" 2" TYP. 8"

1' - 4

"

5' - 4

"2'

- 8"

1" CLEAR LOW-E GLASS

T T

TT

T T

TT

TT

1" TEMP. CLEAR LOW-E GLASS

DECORATIVE CAST STONE FRAME

MUNTINS, EQ. SPACED

1' - 8

"

1' - 3"

10"

6' - 3

1/8"

8 1/2"

CAST STONE HEADER

SEALANT OVER BACKER ROD EACH SIDE

ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

EXT. INT.

NOTE: PROVIDE 3 DOOR FRAME ANCHORS PER DOOR LEAF

DRIP STRIP, SEE DOOR HARDWARE 3 1/2" 4 1/2"

1 3/4"

1/4"

PAINT EXPOSED LINTEL, TYP.

MORTAR NET

SHT. MTL. FLASHING W/ WEEPS @ 16" O.C.

GROUT SOLID BELOW FLASHING

METAL STUD FRAMING, SEE STRUCTURAL

5/8" GYP. BOARD

10"

6"

1' - 4

"

1/2"

1 1/2"

3 1/2" 4 1/2"

SHIM W/ SEALANT OVER BACKER ROD EACH SIDE

ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

METAL STUD FRAMING, SEE STRUCTURAL

NOTE: PROVIDE 3 DOOR FRAME ANCHORS PER DOOR LEAF

1 3/4"

5/8" GYP. BOARD

7 5/8"

3/8"

1"CAST STONE JAMB

GENERAL NOTES - PARITION TYPES:

1. PROVIDE MOISTURE RESISTANT GYP. BD. ON ENTIRE WALL SURFACE AT ALL WET WALL AREAS, INCLUDING TOILET ROOMS AND JANITOR'S CLOSET.

2. PROVIDE SOUND BATTS AS NOTED ON PLANS.

K1

2 1/2" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C.

SECTION

PLAN

5/8" GYPSUMBOARD TO DECK

3 1/8"

(WHERE OCCURS)FIN. CLG.

CEILING (WHERE OCCURS)


SECTION

PLAN

DOOR FRAME, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE

2x F.R.T. WD. BLKG. AT ALL OPENINGS GREATER THAN 3'-0" WIDE

6" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C.

5/8" GYPSUM BOARD TO DECK

STRUCT. BRACING(WHERE OCCURS)

FACE OF WALL(WHERE OCCURS)

INSULATION BATTS, WHERE INDICATED ON

PLAN


6" M

IN.

L4STUDS / GYP. BD. 7 1/4"

J1

FIN. CLG.(WHERE OCCURS)

STRUCTURALBRACING (WHEREOCCURS)

3 5/8" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C.

2x FRT WOOD BLOCKINGAT ALL OPENINGS GREATER THAN 3'-0" WIDE

STD. STEEL DOORFRAME

SECTION

CEILING (WHEREOCCURS)

PLAN

5/8" GYPSUMBOARD TO DECK

SOUNDATTENUATION

BATTS, WHEREINDICATED ON

PLANS

4"

4 7/8"

STUDS / GYP. BD. TO STRUCTURE / DECK ABOVE

FACE OF WALL(WHERE

OCCURS)

J4STUDS / GYP. BD. TO CEILING STRUCTURE

1-HOUR FIRE RATED 1-HOUR FIRE RATED

STUDS / GYP. BD. TO STRUCTURE / DECK ABOVE STUDS / GYP. BD. TO CEILING STRUCTURE


SECTION

PLAN DOOR FRAME, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE

2x F.R.T. WD. BLKG. AT ALL OPENINGS GREATER THAN 3'-0" WIDE

5/8" GYP. BD. ON 6" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. ON 2" AIR SPACE

STRUCT. BRACING(WHERE OCCURS)

FACE OF WALL(WHERE OCCURS)


6" M

IN.

L1STUDS / GYP. BD. 15 7/8"

STUDS / GYP. BD. TO STRUCTURE / DECK

1-HOUR FIRE RATED

5/8" GYPSUM BOARD TO DECK

6" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C.

SILL

HEI

GHT

2' - 8

"7'

- 8"

5' - 4

"

R 11' - 0" 2" TYP.

EQ EQ EQ EQ

2" T

YP.

4' - 8"10' - 8"

EQ EQ

1' - 4

"2'

- 0"

5' - 4

"

2" TYP. 2" TYP.

EQ EQ EQ EQ

2" T

YP.

10' - 8"

1' - 4

"2'

- 0"

5' - 4

"SI

LL H

T.

2' - 8

"7'

- 4"

7' - 4

"

7' - 4"

1' - 4

"2'

- 0"

5' - 4

"

7' - 4

"

SILL

HT.

2' - 8

" 2' - 4" 2' - 8" 2' - 4"

2" TYP.

AB C D

1' - 4

"

8" 8" 8" 8"8" 8" 8" 8"

8"8"

11 1/

2"

1" CLEARLOW-E GLASS,TYP.

DECORATIVECAST STONEFRAME, TYP.

MUNTINS,EQ. SPACED

SILL

HEI

GHT

2' - 8

"

1' - 8

"

1' - 8

"

1' - 8

"

1' - 8

"

1' - 3"

10"

8"

1' - 3"

10"

1' - 3"

10"

1' - 3"

10"

BA

MEDIUM STYLEALUM/GLASS DOOR

2" 2"

2"

10" M

IN.

1

TEMPERED GLASS

SOLID COREWOOD DOOR

C

SOLID COREWOOD DOOR

6"x33" VIEW LITE, 1/4" TEMPERED GLASS

LOCK TYPES:

PA - PASSAGE: BOTH LEVERS ALWAYS UNLOCKED.

PR - PRIVACY: PUSH-BUTTON LOCKING. CAN BE OPENED FROM OUTSIDE WITH SMALL SCREWDRIVER. TURNING INSIDE LEVER OR CLOSING DOOR RELEASES BUTTON.

E - ENTRY: UNLOCKED BY KEY FROM OUTSIDE WHEN OUTSIDE LEVER IS LOCKED BY KEY IN INSIDE LEVER. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS UNLOCKED.

C - CLASSROOM: OUTSIDE LEVER LOCKED AND UNLOCKED BY KEY. INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS UNLOCKED.

O - OFFICE: PUSH-BUTTON LOCKING. PUSH-BUTTON LOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER UNTIL UNLOCKED WITH KEY OR BY ROTATING INSIDE LEVER.

S - STOREROOM: OUTSIDE LEVER FIXED. ENTRANCE BY KEY ONLY. INSIDE LEVER ALWAYS UNLOCKED.

DOOR NOTES:ALL EXTERIOR MAN AND OVERHEAD DOORS SHALL BE INSULATED (MIN. R-7).

2

C F12A302

8A302

3

D E

A010

11

10' - 8"

2' - 4" 6' - 0" 2' - 4" 2' - 0" 3' - 4"

100

3' - 4" 2' - 0"

2' - 0

"

UTILITY FACE BRICK OVER 2" AIRSPACE ON FLUID APPLIED BARRIER ON E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL. STUDS. SEE STRUCT.

UTILITY FACE BRICK OVER 2" AIRSPACE ON FLUID APPLIED BARRIER ON

E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL. STUDS. SEE STRUCT. CAST STONE BASE,

BELOW

CAST STONE SILL

GYP. BOARD ON METAL STUDS

DECORATIVE CAST STONE ELEMENT, SEE 12/A010


DOOR HARDWARE

PRODUCT

1 1/2 PAIR HINGES (EA. LEAF)

MANUF. MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION/SPEC.

1

DOOR CLOSER (EA. LEAF)2

3

4

HAGER BB1279 INTERIOR / BB1191 EXTERIOR NON RISING PINS TO BE USED ON OUTSWINGING EXTERIOR DOORS

NORTON 7700 SERIES PARALLEL ARM @ EXT. DOORS, REGULAR ARM @ INTERIOR DOORS

THRESHOLDS

5

NGP 8425 W/ THERMAL BREAK

DOOR SWEEPS

6

NGP 200NA --

WEATHER-STRIPPING

7

STOREFRONT MFR. --

8

9

10

DRIP STRIP

11

NGP 16A --

12

13

KICKPLATE ROCKWOOD K1050 10" x 34" - US32D FOUR SIDES BEVELED

EXIT DEVICE VON DUPRIN 99L x 17 --

DOOR STOP ROCKWOOD 409 --

SILENCERS ROCKWOOD 609 --

NOTE: 1.HARDWARE PROVIDED FOR BASIS OF DESIGN ONLY. CONTRACTOR ALLOWED TO SUBMIT ALTERNATES OF EQUAL QUALITY.2. ALL DOOR HARDWARE TO BE US26D, US32D OR 626 FINISH3. ALUMINUM ENTRY DOOR MANUFACTURER TO PROVIDE OFFSET PIVOTS (TOP, INTER., & BOTTOM), WEATHERSTRIPPING & STANDARD OFFSET DOOR PULLS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. COORD. ALL OTHER HARDWARE SCHEDULED.

PASSAGE LATCHSET --

EXIT DEVICE --

--CYLINDER 6 PIN REMOVABLE CORE

14 FLOOR STOP 442 --

15 PUSH / PULL 107 x 70C FOUR SIDES BEVELED

--16 STOREROOM LOCKSET ND80PD x SPA --

17 EXIT DEVICE 99L - BEx17 - F --

SCHLAGE

VON DUPRIN

ROCKWOODROCKWOODSCHLAGE

VON DUPRIN

ND10S x SPA

99L x 17 - F


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

1" CLEAR LOW-E GLASS

TT

T T

T

1" TEMP. CLEAR LOW-E GLASS

DECORATIVE CAST STONE FRAME

MUNTINS, EQ. SPACED

2' - 8

"5'

- 4"

2' - 0

"1'

- 4"

3' - 3"2' - 9"

2" TYP. 102

1' - 8

"

8"8"

10' -

0"6' - 0"

1' - 3"

10"

7' - 4

"

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A010DOOR SCHEDULE & TYPICAL DETAILS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

DOORS FRAMES

DOOR SCHEDULE

NO. TYPE MAT'L. Width HEIGHT THICKNESS HARDWARE REQUIRED LOCKTYPE LAB. NOTES TYPE MAT'L. HEAD JAMBS SILL LAB.

100 A AL 6' - 0" 8' - 0" MANF. 2, 3, 4, ,5, 8, 13 2 11/A010 AL 20/A010101 B WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" 1, 2, 7, 10, 14, 17 60 1 HM 19/A010 19/A010102 A AL 3' - 0" 8' - 0" MANF. 2, 3, 4, ,5, 6, 8, 13 16/A010 AL 20/A010

102A B WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" 1, 2, 7, 10, 12, 14, 17 60 1 HM 19/A010 19/A010130D B 3' - 0"130E B 6' - 0"130F B 6' - 0"201 B WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" 1, 2, 7, 10, 14 60 1 HM 19/A010 19/A010202 B WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" 1, 2, 7, 10, 14 60 1 HM 19/A010 19/A010203 C WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" 1, 2, 7, 10, 14, 15 1 HM 19/A010 19/A010204 C WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" 1, 2, 7, 10, 14, 15 1 HM 19/A010 19/A010205 C WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" 1, 2, 7, 9, 10, 16 S 1 HM 19/A010 19/A010206 C WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 1 3/4" 1, 2, 7, 9, 10, 11 PA 1 HM 19/A010 19/A010

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"19 DOOR HEAD/JAMB DETAILS

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"20 DOOR SILL - TYPICAL

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"11 ENTRY DOOR DETAILSCALE: 3" = 1'-0"7 MASONRY DOOR HEAD

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"3 MASONRY DOOR JAMB

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 PARTITION TYPES

SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"2 WINDOW ELEVATIONS

PAIR 3' - 0"

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"1 PLAN DETAIL @ ENTRY

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"16 DETAIL

AS REQ'D 3' - 0".

2"

STL. ANGLE SUPPORTS, RE: STRUCT.

ROOF CONDUCTOR, RE: PLUMBING

OVERFLOW CONDUCTOR, RE: PLUMBING

UNDECK CLAMP & RECEIVER

ROOF MEMBRANE ON RIGID INSUL. (RE: SPECS) ON MTL. DECK (RE: STRUCT.)

OVERFLOW COLLARROOF DRAIN, MECH. FASTENED TO BASE

DOWNSPOUT NOZZLE, RE: ELEVATIONS

NOTES:1. ALL HORIZONTAL ROOF DRAINS SHALL BE INSULATED - RE: SPEC.

PLAN

SEE ROOF PLAN FOR LOCATIONS OFALL WALKWAYS AND MECHANICAL UNITS.

SECTION

A

A

MOLDED WALK PADS BY ROOF MANUFACTURER - SEE SPECS

MOLDED WALK PADS BY ROOF MANUFACTURER - SEE SPECS

NOTE:

2' - 6" SQ.

2' - 6

" SQ.

------

SLOAN AER-DEC INTEGRATED

SEE PLUMBING DWGS

BOBRICK B-293 2436BOBRICK B-6806x36BOBRICK B-6806x42

XLERATOR HAND DRYER

BOBRICK B-2888

L

23 56"X60" TOILET CLEARANCE22 30"X48" LAV CLEARANCE21 FLOOR DRAIN (STAINLESS STEEL)20 GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE

4

2

17

ACCESSIBLE SINK

1614

ACCESSIBLE TOILET

1312

FINISHEDFLOOR

17

10 1312

C

14

LINE OF WALLOR TOILETPARTITION

MFR/MODEL #ID # ACCESSORYFIXTURE & ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

84

36" GRAB BARMIRROR - TYPE 1 (16"X20")

42" GRAB BAR10

PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER/TRASH RECP.

TOILET PAPER DISPENSER, DOUBLE ROLL

2

A. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE GRAB BARS & MIRRORS. ALL OTHER ACCESSORIES & PLUMBING FIXTURES INDICATED ON THIS SHEET & THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT ARE PROVIDED BY OWNER, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED.

B. SEE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR VARIATIONS IN LOCATIONS.

C. SET ALL FLOOR DRAINS TO AN ELEVATION FOR POSITIVE DRAINAGE FORTHE ENTIRE SPACE THE DRAIN SERVES. THE FINISHED FLOOR SLOPESHALL BE 1/8" PER FOOT MINIMUM TO THE FLOOR DRAIN(S). FINISH TO BE SILVER.

D. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL 1/4" THICK FRAMEDMIRRORS AS SHOWN ON ELEVATIONS. BOTTOM EDGE OF MIRRORS TO BE 40" AFF. SEE SPECS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

E. ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES TO BE FULLY ACCESSIBLE.

TYPICAL PLUMBING FIXTURE & ACCESSORY - GENERAL NOTES

BOBRICK B-6806x1818 18" VERTICAL GRAB BAR

18 SEE PLUMBING DWGSTROUGH LAVATORY (NOT SHOWN)3

39" MIN 41" MAX

1' - 0" MAX6" MAX

1' - 3

"

7"-9"

17"-1

9"

3' - 0

"

3' - 4

" MAX

2' - 1

0" M

AX

2' - 5

" MIN

2' - 3

" MIN

1' - 3" MIN

MIN

1' - 5"

KNEE CLEAR8" MIN

6" MAX

9" M

IN

4' - 0

" MAX

1' - 6"

EIFS REVEAL, TYP. RE: ELEVATIONS

3/4"

1/2"

1"

1 1/2" SQ. STL. HANDRAIL FIN. PER SCHED. (RETURN TO WALL OR POST AT ENDS), TYP.

1 1/2" Ø STL. PIPE HANDRAIL FIN. PER SCHED. (RETURN TO WALL OR POST AT ENDS), TYP.

1/2" SQUARE BENT STL. BAR BRACKET @ 5'-0" O.C., PTD PER SCHED. - TYP.

1 1/2" SQ. STL. PIPE, PTD. PER SCHED. -TYP3/4" SQ. STL. BAR @ 4" O.C., PTD. PER SCHED.

STL. STRINGER (PTD), SEE STRUCT. DWGS.

1 1/2"

0' - 5

"2'

- 0"

0' - 3

"0'

- 8"

1 1/2" 1 1/2"

FIRE TREATED BLOCKING. AS REQ'D.

1/2" SQ. BENT STL. BAR BRACKET W/ 3" Ø 1/4" STL. PLATE @ 5'-0" O.C., PTD. PER SCHED. -TYP.

A B

PER PLAN

1 1/2" Ø STL. PIPE RAIL - PTD.

1' - 0"

MAX

4" O.C.

1 1/2" Ø STL. PIPE RAIL & INTERMEDIATE POST - PTD.

NOTE:

GRIND ALL WELDS SMOOTH & EASE ALL EDGES

ALL STEEL TO BE PAINTED

CONCRETE TO BE SMOOTH FINISH

STL. STRINGER (PTD), TYP.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONC. TREADS W/ NON-SLIP SURFACE IN STL. PANS - TYP.

1 1/2" x 1 1/2" CLIP ANGLE, EACH SIDE

3 1/2"x3 1/2"x5/16" CLIP ANGLE, EACH SIDE, RE: STRUCT. DWGS

3/4" DIA. STL. BALLUSTERS - TYP.

3" 11" 1"

5"2"

3/4" PLYWOOD TOEXTEND FULL HEIGHTAT LADDER

BILCO (OR APPROVED EQUAL)LADDER AND SAFETY CAGE. PAINTCAGE SAFETY YELLOW. FULL HEIGHTSTEEL LADDER TO HAVE KNURLEDNON-SLIP RUNGS.

METAL STUD WALLCONSTRUCTION -SEE PLAN & SECTIONS

PLYW

OOD

PROT

ECTI

ON B

OARD

2' - 6

" MIN

.

7"

1' - 4

"

2' - 3

"

7"2' - 7" BOTTOM HOOP

4

A011

Sim

CL OF LADDER

SEE DETAILS 2 & 7/A011 FOR HATCH INFORMATION

BILCO (OR APPROVEDEQUAL) LADDER ANDLADDER SAFETY CAGE,REQUIRED BY ROSSSTORES. PAINT CAGESAFETY YELLOW. LADDERRUNGS TO BE KNURLED,NON-SLIP.

WALK PAD

WALK PAD

3/4" FIRE RATEDPLYWOOD OVER 5/8" GYP. BOARD; FULL HEIGHT AT LADDER

FIN. FLOOR

7"

2' - 7"

8' - 0

"

TYPI

CAL

1' - 0

"

RUNG

S AT

1'-0

" O.C

.

2

A011

Sim

THERMOSTAT

TELEPHONE (MOUNT HIGHEST OPERABLE PART AT 48" AFF)

SWITCH

DOOR HANDLE

OUTLET DEVICES (SWITCHES SIM.)

FIRE EXTINGUISHERCABINET

AUDIBLE/VISUALALARMS NOTES:

1. ALL MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS.

2. ALL DEVICES SHALL BE WHITE. 4"

12"

4' - 6

"

18"

1"

3' - 6

"

4' - 0

"

6' - 8

"

WALL PARALLEL TO DECK DIAGONAL TO DECKWALL PERPENDICULAR /

FIRE-SAFING @ RATED WALLS,SMOKE PARTIONS, AND WHENREQ' BY LOCAL AUTHORITYRIGID INSULATIONMETAL ROOFDECK METAL ROOF DECK

RIGID INSULATION

FIRE-SAFING @ RATEDWALLS, SMOKE PARTIONS,AND WHEN REQ' BY LOCALAUTHORITY

GYP. BD. ATTACHED TOD.W. ANGLE @ DECK -DO NOT FASTEN TOWALL BD.1 1/4" DEEP LEG METALSTUD TRACK - GA. TOMATCH STUD WALL GA.

GYP. EA. SIDE - SEEPARTITION TYPE FORADDITIONAL INFO.

SEE ADJACENTDETAIL FOR ALLOTHER INFO

"SLD" VERTICLIP @ EA.STUD STUD - MANUF. BYTSN, INC., OR APPROVEDEQUAL METHOD.

18 GA. CONT. PLATEAS REQUIRED WITH#8 SCREWS EACHEND TO DECK AT12" O.C.

3/4"

3/4"

2"

PARTITION NOTES

A. ALL METAL STUD MEMBERS SHALL BE FORMED FROM CORROSION-RESISTANT STEEL, CORRESPONDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM A1003 AND SHALL BE ZINC COATED WITH A MINIMUM G4O COATING MEETING ASTM A653. STUDS SHALL BE A MINIMUM 22 MIL. "C" SHAPE, 1 1/4" WIDE, OF THE DEPTHS AND SPACING SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. TRACKS SHALL BE 20 MIL., WITH A MINIMUM FLANGE OF 1 1/4". BRIDGING SHALL BE COLD ROLLED CHANNEL, MINIMUM 1 1/2" DEEP WITH 9/16" FLANGE WIDTH. SPACE BRIDGING @ 4'-0" MAXIMUM o.c. VERTICALLY. DOUBLE UP STUDS @ ALL JAMBS. ALL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. SPLICE IN HEAVY GAUGE FRAMING MEMBERS, OTHER THAN RUNNER TRACK SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. ANCHOR RUNNER TRACK TO CONCRETE WITH .11" DIA. x 1 1/2" HILTI FASTENERS PER I.C.B.O. #2388 @ 24" o.c. MAX, PER ASTM C754.

B. ALL STUD WALLS THAT EXTEND TO STRUCTURE ABOVE MUST ALLOW FOR 3/4" DEFLECTION IN ROOF AND ELEVATED FLOORS. SEE DET. 3/A010.

C. ALL STUDS TO COMPLY WITH ICC-ES AC86-2008 & ASTM C754

16"

WIND LOAD: 5psf, DEFLECTION: L/120

STUD SIZE STUD SPACINGWIND LOAD: 5psf, DEFLECTION: L/240

STUD SPACING16"

INTERIOR METAL STUDS CLEAR HEIGHT CHART

3 5/8"x20GA. STUD BRACE AT 48" O.C. WITH (2) #10 SCREWS EACH END

SEE PARTITION TYPE (GAUGE BASED ON CHART)

NOTE:FOR WALLS TERMINATING ABOVE CEILING, PROVIDE LATERAL BRACE AT 8'-0" O.C. MAX. TO ROOF STRUCTURE OR ADJACENT WALLS.

CONT. 20GA. STUD BRACE AT WALL AND AT 4'-0" O.C. WITH (2) SCREWS EACH CROSSING

NESTED 3 5/8"x20GA. STUDS BETWEEN JOIST TOP CHORDS WITH (3) SCREWS OR 3" WELD AND SCREWS AT 24" O.C. TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK.

1-5/8" x 1-1/4" x 22 mil.

2-1/2" x 1-1/4" x 22 mil.

3-1/2" x 1-1/4" x 22 mil.

3-5/8" x 1-1/4" x 22 mil.

4" x 1-1/4" x 22 mil.

5-1/2" x 1-1/4" x 22 mil.

6" x 1-1/4" x 22 mil.

13'-5"

16'-9"

20'-8"

21'-7"

23'-0"

28'-2"

30'-9"

10'-7"

13'-4"

16'-5"

17'-2"

18'-3"

22'-4"

23'-7"

NOTE:

1. Table is based on DIETRICH ProSTUD-Drywall Non-Load Bearing (Nonstructural) Studs, with U.S.G. 5/8" Type X Gypsum Board, (Pro 2D DW Members).2. Table is provided as basis for design only. Supplier/Contractor is responsible for verifying conditions specific to project, alternate manufacturers, etc.3. Clear Height is the distance from floor to top of wall, or to brace location. (Horiz. or diagnal knee brace).4. See Detail 4/A010 for bracing requirements.

4' - 0

" MAX.

PER

BU

ILD

ING

CO

DE

MAX

STU

D C

LEAR

HEI

GH

T

METAL STUDFRAMING ASREQUIRED

GYPSUM BOARDOVER STUDFRAMING - DONOT FASTEN TOWALL BD. BELOW

1 1/4" DEEP LEGMTL. STUD TRACK -GA. TO MATCH STUD WALL GA.

"SLD" VERTICLIP @ EA.STUD STUD - MANUF. BYTSN, INC., OR APPROVEDEQUAL METHOD.

GYPSUM BD. EA. SIDE -SEE PARTITION TYPE FORADDITIONAL INFO. (DO NOTSCREW TO TOP STL. CHANNEL)

METAL STUD - SEE PART.TYP. & CLEAR HEIGHT CHART

METAL STUD FRAMINGAS REQUIRED

STEEL JOISTS (RE: STRUCT.)

UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE

FILL ALL OPENINGS IN METAL DECKFLUTES WITH FIRE-SAFING TO MAINTAINCOMPLETE SEPARATION BETWEEN EACH SIDE

3/4"

2" M

IN.

MAXIMUM SPACING FOR GAS PIPE SUPPORTS

GALVANIZED STRAP FASTEN SLEEVE SECURELY

METAL CLAMP WITH 1/4" CLEARANCE ALL THE WAY AROUND

GAS PIPE

3/8"

3/8"

1/2"

SPACE IN FEET

5'-0"

6'-0"

12'-0"

PIPE SIZE

3/4" - 1 1/4"

1/2"

1 1/2" - 3"

MIN. ROD SIZE IN INCHES

4" SCHEDULE 40 PVC SLEEVE - 6" LONG EXTERIOR GRADE (USE 6" SLEEVE FOR 3" & 4" GAS PIPE)

1/4" GALVANIZED LAG SCREWS

4"x4"x12"L. TREATED WD. BLK.

18"x18" ROOF MEMBRANE PAD GLUE DOWN w/ CONSISTANT EDGE AROUND EA. BLK.

6"

3' - 0"

2' - 6" 6"

42" A

BOVE

ROO

F SU

RFAC

E

BILCO (OR APPROVED EQUAL) 3'-0" X 2'-6" ROOF SCUTTLE W/

INSIDE PADLOCK HASP AND INSULATED CURB

WALK PAD

BILCO (OR APPROVED EQUAL) EXTENSION SAFETY POST REQUIRED BY TENANT

WALK PAD

OF LADDER

BIL-GUARD HATCH RAILING SYSTEM

GUTTER

PROVIDE METAL STRAPS AS REQ'D. HOLD FIRST STRAP 5'-0" (MIN.) ABOVE GRADE ANCHOR HANGERS TO WALL

CONNECT TO STORM SEWER LEADER, RE: CIVIL

EXPANTION JOINT CAP

GUTTER END PLATE

GUTTER

EXP. JT. CAP

GUTTERGUTTER END PLATE

1/2"1/2"

1/2"

A

A

ALL SOLDER JOINTS ON INSIDE OF GUTTER SHALL BE COATED WITH AN ASPHALTIC PAINT

JOINT OCCURS AT MIDSPAN (HIGH POINT) BETWEEN DOWNSPOUTS

SECTION "A - A"

NOTE:

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A011TYPICAL DETAILS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"13 ROOF DRAIN DETAILSCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"9 WALKING PAD DETAIL

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"16 TOILET FIXTURE PLAN & ELEVATIONSSCALE: 3" = 1'-0"8 TYPICAL EIFS REVEAL

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"19 RAILING SECTIONSSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"15 BOTTOM OF STAIR SECTION

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 ROOF ACCESS LADDER PLAN

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"4 ROOF ACCESS LADDER SECTIONSCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"12 TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS & ALIGNMENTS

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"11 SLIPTRACK @ ROOF DECK

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"14 STUD WALL BRACINGSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"10 TOP PLATE DETAIL

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"6 GAS PIPES SUPPORT DETAIL

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"7 ROOF ACCESS HATCH SECTION

SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0"1 DOWNSPOUT DETAILSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5 EXPANSION JOINT @ GUTTER

B

SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0"

A

SLOPE 1:12SLOPE 1:12

SLOP

E 1:1

2

TRUNCATED DOME DETECTABLEWARNING PANEL, MASCO "CASTIN TACT" OR APPROVED EQUAL, PER ADA REQUIREMENTS. COLOR: CONTRASTING COLORSELECTED BY ARCHITECT.

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"

B

4" REING CONC. SLAB ON COMP. GRANULAR FILL

TROWELED CORNERPAVING RE: CIVIL

TRUNCATED DOME DETECTABLE WARNING PANEL, MASCO "CAST INTACT" OR APPROVED EQUAL, PER ADA REQUIREMENTS. COLOR: CONTRASTING COLOR SELECTED BY ARCHITECT.

CURB WHERE INDICATED ON PLANS

6"

1' - 6

"

6"

2' - 0"

AS REQ'D. 4' - 0" AS REQ'D.

6"2'

- 0"

AS R

EQ'D

.

EJ

EJ

EJ

A

B

CONTROL JOINT

EXPANSION JOINT

ALIGN CONTROL JOINTS & EXPANSIONJOINTS W/ CENTERLINE OF WINDOWMULLION (WHERE APPLICABLE)

TOOLED CONTROL JOINT(1/4" WIDE x 1" DEEPMINIMUM)

1/2" PREMOLDED EXPANSION JOINTFILLER W/ STRIPPABLE CAP

TOOLED EDGE

SEALANT

CONC. SLAB. REINF. W/6x6 - W1.4xW1.4 WWF.OVER 4" COMP. GRANULAR FILL

1/2"

4" CONC. SLAB W/ 6x6,W1.4xW1.4 WWF OVER 4" COMP. GRANULAR FILL

THICKENED SLAB

1' - 0

"

A0201

Sim

A0201

Sim

EJ EJEJEJEJ

EJ EJ

EJ

1

1

1 2TYP

3TYP

3

7

7

8

9

8

9

10

10

10TYP

TYP11

11

DAYL

IGHT

CIR

CLE

12

12

A02010

13

EJ

3

SLOPE 1/4" PER FT.

4" CONC. SLAB ON GRADE W/ 1.4X1.4 W.W.F.

4" GRANULAR FILL

COMPACTED FILL

CONTROL JOINT

PAVEMENT - SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS

TROWLED CORNER

16"

6"

6"

6"

2' - 0

"8'

- 8" 10

' - 8"

8"

WHEN GATES ARE IN OPEN POSITION

8' - 10" MIN.

6" DIA. PIPE BOLLARD W/ BOLLARD COVER, TYP.

(COLOR BY ARCHITECT), RE: 6/A020, TYP.

DUMPSTER, BY OTHERS

BORE HOLES IN CONCRETE TO ACCEPT CANE BOLTS FOR OPEN & CLOSED POSITIONS, TYP. HOLE ON

SWING SIDE TO BE LOCATED FOR DOOR TO OPEN TO 105° MIN.

HEAVY DUTY CONC. APRON, SEE CIVIL PLANS

NOTE:REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR ENCLOSURE LOCATIONS

8A020

11' - 4"

EQ EQ EQ

CONCRETE PAD TO BE FLAT, WITH

NO SLOPE

11

A020

Sim

T.O. WALL

EL: 106'-0"

OUTSIDEINSIDE

CONC. SLAB ON COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL W/ 6x6, W 2.9 x 2.9 WWF

REINF., RE: CIVIL & GEOTECH

REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB AND FOOTING

1/2" COMPRESSION FILLER W/ SEALANT, TYP.

FINISH FLOOR

EL: 100'-0"

PRE-FINISHED METAL COPING, SLOPE 1/2" / FT.

2"


A02012

Sim

FACE BRICK TO MATCH BUILDING (BR-1)

T.O. STONE

EL: 102'-8"

CAST STONE SILL TO MATCH BUILDING (CS-1)

1' - 0"

8" CMU BOND BEAM

8" CMU (PAINTED), REINF. HORIZ. AND VERT.

2" PVC OVERFLOW DRAINAGE PIPE @ 8' O.C. PROVIDE S.S. SCREEN ON

INTERIOR SIDE OF SCREEN WALL

PAN FLASHING W/ WEEPS @ 24" O.C.

DECORATIVE CAST STONE VENEER

8"CANE BOLT - STANLEY#1010 STL. 18" OR EQUAL (ONE PER GATE)

COMPOSITE WOOD GATE. COLOR: TO BE SELECTED

6' - 0

"

180 DEG. HINGES

A0208

Sim

3"6"

1"

GROUT POST SOLID

6"x4"x1/2" STL. PL. - CONT. WELD TO COLLAR W/ SPLOTTED HOLES

STL. HINGE COLLAR W/ GREASE FITTING

STL. COLLAR - CONT. WELD TO POST

6" DIA. STL. PIPE

3/4" O.D. BOLT

1/4" STL. GUSSET PLATE

TUBULAR STL. FRAMING

CEMENT WASH

USE 180° HINGES

NOTE:PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL. & GRIND ALL WELD SMOOTH

PRE-FINISHED METAL COPING (AL-1) RE: ELEVATIONS

5/8" E.G. PLYWOO DON CONT. 1x BLKG ON CONT. 2x BLKG

ANCHORED TO CMU

CONT. CLEAT, BOTH SIDES

(2) NO. 6 BARS 12" LONGEACH WAY, WELD TO PIPE

18" DIA. CONCRETE FOOTING

ASPHALT PAVEMENT ORCONCRETE WHERE

OCCURS SEE SITE PLAN

6" DIA. STANDARD STEEL PIPE FILLED WITH CONCRETE AND PAINTED TRAFFIC YELLOW (2

COATS MIN.)

SMOOTH SLOPEDMORTAR CAP PAINTED

4' - 0

"3'

- 0" M

IN.

3" M

IN.

1"

9" 9"

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A020ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"1 ACCESSIBLE SIDEWALK DETAILS

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 JOINT DETAIL

SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"3 CURB SECTION @ LANDSCAPING

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"16 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLANSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 TYPICAL CURB SECTION

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"10 TRASH ENCLOSURE

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"11 TRASH ENCLOSURE SECTION

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"7 TRASH ENCLOSURE GATE ELEVATION

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"8 HINGE DETAILSCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"12 TRASH ENCLOSURE COPING DETAIL

GENERAL NOTES

A. ALL JOINTS INDICATED ON SIDEWALK ARE CONTROL JOINTS (2A/A020) UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

B. JOINTS INDICATED WITH AN "EJ" ARE EXPANSION JOINTS, REFER TO 2B/A020.

C. ALL SIDEWALK JOINTS TO ALIGN WITH STOREFRONT MULLIONS & MASONRY PIERS.

D. SEE CIVIL PLANS FOR ALL SITE WORK.

E. ALL JOINTS IN SIDEWALK TO BE CAULKED WITH DOW-CORNING 790

FLOOR PLAN KEYED NOTES

1. SIDEWALK - 4" CONCRETE SLAB WITH 6"x6" - W1.4xW1.4 W.W.F. ON 4" GRANULAR FILL SLOPED 1/4" PER FOOT FROM BUILDING TO CURB. ALIGN JOINTS WITH MULLIONS.

2. EXPANSION JOINT, RE: 2B/A020.

3. 6" CONCRETE CURB, SIM TO DETAIL 3/A020.

4. GAS METER BANKS

5. ELECTRIC METER BANKS

6. BOLLARD, RE: 4/A020 AND CIVIL DWGS

7. ACCESSIBLE RAMP, RE: 1/A020 AND CIVIL DWGS.

8. MODULAR BLOCK RETAINING WALL, RE: CIVIL DWGS.

9. PEDESTRIAN GUARDRAIL, RE: CIVIL DWGS.

10. PARKING STRIPE, RE: CIVIL DWGS.

11. NEW CONCRETE ENTRANCE, RE: CIVIL DWGS.

12. EXTENTS OF ROOF/CANOPY ABOVE

13. ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGN & POST, RE: CIVIL DWGS.

##

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"6 BOLLARD DETAIL

UP

A201

11

A201

12

A201

9

A201

10

13

9

2

A B C F G H

2' - 2" 1' - 2" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 10" 1' - 6" 2' - 0" 4' - 8" 5' - 4" 4' - 8" 4' - 8" 6' - 0" 4' - 8" 4' - 8" 5' - 4" 4' - 8" 5' - 4" 4' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 6" 1' - 10" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 2" 2' - 2"

2' - 1

"1'

- 3"

4' - 0

"7'

- 4"

5' - 4

"4'

- 8"

6' - 8

"4'

- 8"

2' - 8

"4'

- 8"

6' - 8

"4'

- 8"

5' - 4

"7'

- 4"

4' - 0

"1'

- 2"

2' - 2

"

2' - 2" 1' - 2" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 10" 1' - 6" 2' - 8" 4' - 8" 4' - 0" 4' - 8" 2' - 8" 0' - 8" 2' - 8" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 2' - 8" 8" 2' - 8" 4' - 8" 4' - 0" 4' - 8" 2' - 8" 1' - 6" 1' - 10" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 2" 2' - 2"

100

102A

102

101

8A301

6A301

3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4"

2' - 8

"14

' - 8"

2' - 0

"

37' - 10 7/8" 6' - 9" 14' - 7 1/4" 37' - 9"

2' - 2" 17' - 8" 20' - 10" 6' - 0" 8' - 4" 5' - 8" 20' - 10" 17' - 8" 2' - 2"

1' - 4

1/4"

10' -

0"

39' - 3" 18' - 8" 39' - 1"

3

6

8

11

12

16' -

2"3'

- 4"

15' -

10"

3' - 5

"5'

- 10"

4' - 2

"10

' - 5"

2' - 1

0"12

' - 3"

10' -

0"2'

- 4 1/

8"1'

- 5"

D E

5

7

10

1

C.1 E.9

A1013

A13014

A0101

A1305

A1014

A1308

1' - 0" 18' - 0" 1' - 0"

1' - 8" 1' - 8"

A

B B B B

A

D

B

B

B

B

D

C

BBBBB

C

D

B

B

B

B

D

1ST FLOORTENANT

100

5 1/8" 5 1/8"

11' -

0 3/8"

4' - 1

1/8"

14' -

7 3/4"

24' -

3 7/8"

10' -

8"

38' - 10 1/8" 5' - 0" 8' - 10 7/8" 6' - 6" 37' - 9"

8 1/4"

101' - 4"

2' - 8

"

74' -

8"

2' - 8

"

3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4" 58' - 8" 3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4"

TYP.

2' - 0"

4' - 0

"2' - 0

"

4' - 0

"

3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4" 18' - 8" 3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4" 18' - 8" 3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4"

21' - 4" 58' - 8" 21' - 4"

3' - 4

"23

' - 4"

3' - 4

"14

' - 8"

3' - 4

"23

' - 4"

3' - 4

"

8" TYP.

5 1/8"

5 1/8"

5 1/8"

UP

12A303

A1014

Sim

12

3

4

4TYP.

4TYP.

4TYP.

5TYP.

5TYP.

5TYP.

6TYP.

6TYP.

12

7

7

9

6

FE

8

FE

8

STAIR A101

STAIR B102

7

7

7

7

7

7

FROM CANOPY

7

FROM CANOPY

10

7

7 710

FD

FD

FD

FD

6

6

6

A

6

7

2' - 0"

3' - 4

"

CAST STONE SILL

CAST STONE BASE, BELOW


CAST STONE JAMB, SEE 3/A010

FACE BRICK OVER 2" AIRSPACE ON FLUID

APPLIED BARRIER ON E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL.

STUDS. SEE STRUCT.

DOWNSPOUT, RE: ELEVATIONS

1

C.1

1" TYP.

3' - 4"

2' - 8

"

8"

8"8"

8"

FACE BRICK OVER 2" AIRSPACE ON FLUID APPLIED BARRIER ON E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL. STUDS. SEE STRUCT.

DECORATIVE CAST STONE VENEER, BELOW

CAST STONE SILL

PRE-MANUFACTURED CANOPY COLUMN

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A101FIRST FLOOR PLAN

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

GENERAL NOTESA. IT IS THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO COORDINATE, LOCATE AND CONFIRM ALL FLOOR SINK, UNDERGROUND / OVERHEAD PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL STUB-UPS, SPOT GRADING AT PERIMETER FOUNDATIONS

B. THE ARCHITECT ASSUMES THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR HAS INCLUDED IN HIS BID THE HIGHEST QUALITY AND GREATEST QUANTITY FOR THE PURPOSE OF RESOLVING ANY CONFLICTS IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHICH ARE IMPLIED OR UNDEFINED.

C. * ASSUMED FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION = 100.00'* VERIFY ACTUAL FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION WITH CIVIL DRAWINGS.

D. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CAULK AND SEAL EXPANSION JOINTS AT ALL EXTERIOR/INTERIOR CONCRETE - SEE MASONRY SPECIFICATIONS.

E. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY GOVERNMENTAL REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO BID AND INCLUDE IN BID ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INCLUDING AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICES AND PULL STATIONS WHERE REQUIRED.

F. GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL FURNISH & INSTALL 5 LB MULTIPURPOSE DRY CHEMICAL (2A/10BC) RATED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS IN SEMI-RECESSED CABINET @ 4'-0" A.F.F. AS REQUIRED BY GOVERNMENTAL AUTHORITIES. MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE OF 75'-0" FOR PLACEMENT.

G. FLOOR COVERING: CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE STEEL TRAWLED CONCRETE FLOOR THROUGHOUT (AS INDICATED ON FLOOR PLAN) READY TO RECEIVE TENANT'S FINISHED FLOOR. ALL CONCRETE SLABS TO RECEIVE MOISTURE VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE.

FLOOR PLAN KEYED NOTES1. FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION ASSUMED ELEVATION 100'-0" TYPICAL U.N.O. RE: CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR ALL GRADE INFORMATION.

2. 4" CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB WITH 6"x6" - W1.4xW1.4 W.W.F. ON 10 MIL POLY FILM VAPOR BARRIER ON 4" GRANULAR FILL. RE: STRUCTURAL DWGS.

3. LINE OF CANOPY ABOVE; SEE ELEVATIONS & WALL SECTIONS.

4. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM WITH 1" INSULATED LOW-E GLASS, RE: BUILDING ELEVATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS.

5. STEEL COLUMN. RE: STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.

6. APPROXIMATE LOCATION FOR FUTURE PLUMBING ROUGH-INS. ALL DASHED WALLS & DOORS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

7. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF DOWNSPOUT, TIED TO STORM SEWER. RE: PLUMBING & CIVIL DWGS

8. FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND CABINET PER SPECS. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATIONS W/ AHJ.

9. LOCATION OF FIRE DEPARTMENT KNOX BOX. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHALL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

10. HOSE BIBB, RE: PLUMBING DWGS.

##

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 FIRST FLOOR PLANN

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"3 PLAN DETAIL


DN

13

9

2

A B C F G H

3

6

8

11

12

D E

5

7

10

1

203

204

205

206

201

202

LEASE AREA 1201

LEASE AREA 2202

STAIR A101

MEN'S203

WOMEN'S204

ELECTRICAL206

JANITOR'SCLOSET

205

STAIR B102

37' - 10 7/8" 21' - 4 1/4" 37' - 9"

39' - 3"

INSIDE CLEAR

18' - 8" 39' - 1"5 1/8" 5 1/8"

7' - 2

"11

' - 5 1

/4"5 1

/8"1'

- 1 1/

8"

INSI

DE C

LEAR

8' - 6

"7'

- 4 3/

4"8'

- 8 1/

4"1'

- 4"

8' - 8

"1'

- 4"

8' - 6

"

38' - 4 1/4" 13' - 11" 7' - 0" 38' - 7"

10' -

0"6'

- 7"

5' - 5

"7'

- 0"

6' - 8

1/8"

18' -

4"

17' -

8"5'

- 9"

6' - 1

0"6'

- 7"

10' -

0"

1' - 6"

5 1/8"5 1/8"

A1307

A13016

12A303

J4

J4

L4

J4J4

L4

J4 J4J4

2' - 2" 1' - 2" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 10" 1' - 6" 2' - 0" 4' - 8" 5' - 4" 4' - 8" 4' - 8" 5' - 4" 4' - 8" 5' - 4" 4' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 6" 1' - 10" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 2" 2' - 2"

2' - 1

"1'

- 3"

4' - 0

"7'

- 4"

5' - 4

"4'

- 8"

6' - 8

"4'

- 8"

2' - 8

"4'

- 8"

6' - 8

"7'

- 4"

4' - 0

"1'

- 2"

2' - 2

"

2' - 2" 1' - 2" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 10" 1' - 6" 2' - 8" 4' - 8" 4' - 0" 4' - 8" 2' - 8" 8" 2' - 8" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 2' - 8" 8" 2' - 8" 4' - 8" 4' - 0" 4' - 8" 2' - 8" 1' - 6" 1' - 10" 2' - 0" 10' - 8" 2' - 0" 1' - 2" 2' - 2"

38' - 7" 19' - 4" 39' - 1"5 1/8" 5 1/8"

38' - 6" 5' - 4 1/8" 8' - 10 7/8" 6' - 6" 37' - 9"8 1

/4"

4' - 0

"

8"

5 1/8"

5 1/8"

4' - 8

"5'

- 4"

5' - 4" 4' - 8" 5' - 4"

J4

J4

J4

A130

1

2

3

4

2' - 2" 17' - 8" 20' - 10" 6' - 0" 8' - 4" 5' - 8" 20' - 10" 17' - 8" 2' - 2"

16' -

2"3'

- 4"

15' -

10"

3' - 5

"5'

- 10"

4' - 2

"10

' - 5"

2' - 1

0"12

' - 3"

10' -

0"2'

- 4 1/

8"1'

- 5"

101' - 4"

74' -

8"

3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4" 58' - 8" 3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4"

3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4" 18' - 8" 3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4" 18' - 8" 3' - 4" 14' - 8" 3' - 4"

21' - 4" 58' - 8" 21' - 4"

3' - 4

"23

' - 4"

3' - 4

"14

' - 8"

3' - 4

"23

' - 4"

3' - 4

"

C

E E E E E E

C

D

E

E

E

E

D

C

BBCBB

C

D

E

E

E

E

D

A130

1 Sim

4

Sim

3 Sim

2

Sim

7

7

3

4

5TYP.

5

12

TYP.TYP.

12

4TYP.

4TYP.

FE

FE

6

6

13

A303

Sim

13

A303

Sim

13

A303

Sim

8

6

6

6 6

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A102SECOND FLOOR PLAN

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

GENERAL NOTESA. IT IS THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO COORDINATE, LOCATE AND CONFIRM ALL FLOOR SINK, UNDERGROUND / OVERHEAD PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL STUB-UPS, SPOT GRADING AT PERIMETER FOUNDATIONS

B. THE ARCHITECT ASSUMES THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR HAS INCLUDED IN HIS BID THE HIGHEST QUALITY AND GREATEST QUANTITY FOR THE PURPOSE OF RESOLVING ANY CONFLICTS IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHICH ARE IMPLIED OR UNDEFINED.

C. * ASSUMED FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION = 116' 8".

D. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CAULK AND SEAL EXPANSION JOINTS AT ALL EXTERIOR/INTERIOR CONCRETE - SEE MASONRY SPECIFICATIONS.

E. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY GOVERNMENTAL REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO BID AND INCLUDE IN BID ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INCLUDING AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICES AND PULL STATIONS WHERE REQUIRED.

F. GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL FURNISH & INSTALL 5 LB MULTIPURPOSE DRY CHEMICAL (2A/10BC) RATED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS IN SEMI-RECESSED CABINET @ 4'-0" A.F.F. AS REQUIRED BY GOVERNMENTAL AUTHORITIES. MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE OF 75'-0" FOR PLACEMENT.

G. FLOOR COVERING: CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE STEEL TRAWLED CONCRETE FLOOR THROUGHOUT (AS INDICATED ON FLOOR PLAN) READY TO RECEIVE TENANT'S FINISHED FLOOR. ALL CONCRETE SLABS TO RECEIVE MOISTURE VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE.

FLOOR PLAN KEYED NOTES ##

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 SECOND FLOOR PLAN

1. FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION ASSUMED ELEVATION 116'-8" TYPICAL U.N.O.

2. 2 1/2" CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB WITH 6"x6" - W1.4xW1.4 W.W.F. ON METAL DECK. (4 1/2" TOTAL THICKNESS) RE: STRUCTURAL DWGS.

3. LINE OF CANOPY BELOW; SEE ELEVATIONS & WALL SECTIONS.

4. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM WITH 1" INSULATED LOW-E GLASS, RE: BUILDING ELEVATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS.

5. STEEL COLUMN. RE: STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.

6. FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND CABINET PER SPECS. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATIONS W/ AHJ.

7. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF DOWNSPOUT, TIED TO STORM SEWER. RE: CIVIL DWGS

8. ROOF ACCESS LADDER & HATCH, RE: DETAILS 2 & 5/A011.

9. FUTURE WALLS AND DOORS SHOWN DASHED.

10" / 1'-0"

10" /

1'-0

"

10" /

1'-0

"

10" /

1'-0

"

10" / 1'-0"

10" /

1'-0

"

10" /

1'-0

"

10" /

1'-0

"

RTU-1 RTU-2

SLATE SHINGLES, TYP.

RTU-3

RTU-4

2' - 0

1/4"

1' - 5" 1' - 5"

14

5

2

14

5

3TYP.

6

7

78

8

9TYP.

10

10

10

11

11

14

11

1213

13

13

11

8 8

18 18

19TYP

1515

15

15

18 18

21

21

20

20

17TYP

18

VARI

ES W

/ROO

FSL

OPE

2 PIECE COUNTERFLASHING AND RECEIVER (SET PRIOR TO MECHANICAL UNIT) SECURED WITH NEOPRENE GASKETED #10 SCREW FASTENERS AT 18" O.C.

BASE FLASHING

HEMMED DRIP EDGE

METAL CURB - SUPPLIED BY MECHANICAL SUPPLIER

FILL VOID OF MTL. DECK W/ TREATED WOOD BLOCKING

UNDER METAL CURB NOTE:

AT LEAST ONE SIDE OF THE ROOF OPENING SHALL BE SUPPORTED BY A ROOF FRAMING MEMBER. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.

ROOF SQUARE FOOTAGE: 530 S.F.530 S.F. / 1 DOWNSPOUTS = 530 S.F./R.D.(SMACNA) TABLE 1-2 -- 100 YEAR S.F./S.I. = 120530 / 120 = 4.4 SQUARE INCHES OF DOWNSPOUT AREAUSE (1) 4" x 3" DOWNSPOUT (12 SQUARE INCHES)

MANSARD ROOF DRAIN CALCULATIONS

NEW .5" HIGH DENSITYPOLYISOCYANURATE

COVER BOARD

NEW STAINLESS STEELCLAMPING RING

NEWWATERBLOCKMASTIC

EXISTING SINGLETYPE CONDUIT ORPIPE PENETRATION

EXISTING STEELROOF DECKING

NEW MOLDED PVCBOOT FLASHING

NEW FASTENER

NEW HOT AIRWELD ASSEMBLY

EXISTING BURASSEMBLY

NEW EDGE SEALANT,IF REQUIRED

INSTALL NEW SECUREMENTTHROUGH PVC MEMBRANEAROUND EACH PENETRATION

NEW 60 MIL SCRIMREINFORCED PVCROOF MEMBRANE

CENTERLINEDWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A110ROOF PLAN

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 ROOF PLAN

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 ROOF CURB ISOMETRIC

1. ROOF SLOPE 1/4" PER FOOT MINIMUM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

2. PROVIDE TAPERED INSULATED CRICKETS TYPICAL AT ALL ROOF TOP UNITS, SLOPE 1/2" PER FOOT MIN. INSTALL FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING PER ROOFING MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS.

3. ROOF TOP UNITS SHOWN FOR GRAPHIC PURPOSES ONLY. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES PER LOAD CALCULATIONS AND TENANT LEASE REQUIREMENTS, RE: DESIGN/BUILD DWGS.

4. PROVIDE GAS PIPING SUPPORTS PER SECTION 6/A011. PAINT (2) TWO COATS OF SAFETY YELLOW.

5. FULLY ADHERED "WHITE" TPO ROOF MEMBRANE. RE: SPECIFICATIONS.

6. PRE-MANUFACTURED CANOPY AND FRAMING. COORD. FOUNDATION & ATTACHMENT TO BUILDING STRUCTURE W/ STRUCTURAL

7. FACE OF BUILDING BELOW, TYP.

8. PRE-FINISHED SHT. MTL. GUTTER & DOWNSPOUT. SEE DETAILS 1 & 5/A011. SIZE & INSTALL PER SMACNA RECOMMENDATIONS.

9. PROVIDE TAPERED INSULATED CRICKETS TYPICAL, SLOPE 1/2" PER FOOT MIN.

10. STANDING SEAM METAL BARREL ROOF ON SELF-ADHESIVE FELT MEMBRANE ON E.G. PLYWOOD SHEATHING.

11. SLATE ROOF MANSARD ON SELF-ADHESIVE FELT MEMBRANE ON E.G. PLYWOOD SHEATHING.

12. ROOF SCUTTLE AND LADDER. RE: DETAIL 2, 4 & 7/A011

13. ROOF DRAIN, SEE DETAIL 13/A011.

14. HATCH REPRESENTS LARGEST MANSARD ROOF SQUARE FOOTAGE COVERED BY ONE DOWNSPOUT. AREA SHOWN FOR SMACNA ROOF DRAIN CALCULATION.

15. PRE-FINISHED METAL RIDGE CAP, RE: ELEVS FOR COLOR.

16. PRE-FINISHED METAL VALLEY.

17. ROOF WALKING PADS, RE: 9/A011. PROVIDE ACCESS FROM ROOF HATCH TO AROUND ALL ROOFTOP MECH. EQUIP.

18. ROOFTOP MECHANICAL EXHAUST FAN, RE: MECHANICAL

19. GRAVITY ROOF VENT

20. PROVIDE ACCESS DOOR INTO MANSARD. PROVIDE ONE PER DRAFTSTOP AREA.

21. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF DRAFTSTOPPING. DRAFTSTOPPING TO BE IBC APPROVED DRAFT STOP - 1/2" GYP. BD MIN. IN CONCEALED ROOF/ATTIC SPACES PER SECTION 7. DRAFTSTOP TO EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK AND EXTEND INTO ROOF OVERHANGS. HORIZONTAL AREA NOT TO EXCEED 3000 SF. PROVIDE 2'-0" x 3'-0" HINGED ACCESS PANEL TO EACH DRAFTSTOP AREA.

ROOF PLAN GENERAL NOTES

ROOF PLAN KEYED NOTES ##

A. RE: MECHANICAL/PLUMBING DRAWING FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND DETAILS.

B. VERIFY LOCATIONS OF ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS WITH STRUCTURAL, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS.

C. ALL EQUIPMENT ON ROOF TO BE MOUNTED ON CURBS, RE: DETAIL 3/A110.

D. ALL VENT LOCATIONS SHOULD BE VERIFIED WITH PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.

E. EXHAUST FANS AND VENTS TO BE LOCATED A MINIMUM OF 10'-0" FROM ROOFTOP UNITS. VERIFY LOCATIONS WITH PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.

F. MECHANICAL SUB-CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE INSTALLATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF PRE-FABRICATED CURBS AND PENETRATIONS WITH ROOF MEMBRANE SUB-CONTRACTOR. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY BLOCKING, NAILING, ETC. AS NECESSARY FOR A WATERTIGHT AND WATERPROOF BUILDING.

G. IT IS THE GENERAL CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY, COORDINATE AND/OR RELATED FLASHING, BLOCKING, NAILERS, INSULATION, STOPS, CRICKETS, ETC. NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF THE ROOF MEMBRANE WHICH ARE REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE, WARRANTED, WATERTIGHT AND WATERPROOF INSTALLATION.

H. ALL ROOF SLOPES ARE TO HAVE A MINIMUM 1/4" FALL WHERE CRICKET VALLEYS OCCUR. CRICKETS ARE TO BE PROVIDED WITH SUFFICIENT DEPTH AND SLOPE TO ACCOMMODATE A MINIMUM 1/4" PER FOOT FALL AT VALLEY.

I. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL A COMPLETE ROOFING SYSTEM THAT IS FULLY ADHERED MIN .060 INCH THICK 'TAN' TPO MEMBRANE OVER RIGID BOARD ROOF DECK INSULATION, PROVIDING A MINIMUM OF R-20 OF POLY-ISO BOARD INSULATION THROUGHOUT ROOF, TYPICAL., RE: SPECIFICATIONS.

J. ADDITIONAL RTU'S, MAU'S, EXHAUST FANS, CONDUITS, VENTS, ETC. ARE TO BE FLASHED PER ROOFING MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND WORK SHALL BE DONE BY SHELL ROOFING SUBCONTRACTOR.

K. ALL RTU'S ARE TO HAVE FACTORY DISCONNECTS.

L. PROVIDE FREEZE PROOF HOSE BIBB ON ROOF, RE: PLUMBING

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"4 MOLDED BOOT PVC FLASHING DETAIL

13

9

2

A B C F G H

3

6

8

11

12

D E

5

7

10

LEASE AREA 1201

LEASE AREA 2202

STAIR A101

MEN'S203

WOMEN'S204

ELECTRICAL206

JANITOR'SCLOSET

205

STAIR B102

125' - 8"

125' - 8"

125' - 8"

125' - 8"

ELEVATOR SHAFTNO CEILING

CEILING UNDERSEPARATE PACKAGE

CEILING UNDERSEPARATE PACKAGE

NO CEILING

NO CEILING

131' - 8"131' - 8"

131' - 8"

EQ. 9' - 0" EQ.

EQEQ

EQEQ

EQ. 9' - 0" EQ.

5' - 8 1/4"

MECHANICAL CHASE

1

2

1

2

CUT ACT. TILE AROUND BRACKETS

SCHEDULED PARTITION (13'-0" MAX. PART. HEIGHT)

1. DESIGN BUILD CONTRACTORS TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ADEQUATE LATERAL SUPPORT TO SUSTAIN SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS AS OUTLINED IN INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODES FOR ALL PIPES AND MECHANICAL DUCTWORK.

2. 2. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE FASTENED TO MAIN TEE WHERE POSSIBLE (4 SCREWS MIN.).

3. SEISMIC RESTRAINTS MAY BE OMITTED FOR THE FOLLOWING INSTALLATIONS: - GAS PIPING LESS THAN 1 INCH INSIDE DIAMETER. - PIPING IN BOILER AND MECHANICAL ROOMS LESS THAN 1 1/4" INSIDE DIAMETER. - ALL OTHER PIPING LESS THAN 2 1/2" INSIDE DIAMETER. - ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUIT LESS THAN 2 1/2" INSIDE DIAMETER. - ALL RECTANGULAR AIR HANDLING DUCTS LESS THAN 6 S.F. IN CROSS SECTION AREA. - ALL ROUND AIR HANDLING DUCTS LESS THAN 28" IN DIAMETER. - ALL PIPING SUSPENDED BY INDIVIDUAL HANGERS 12" OR LESS IN LENGTH FROM THE TOP OF THE PIPE TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SUPPORT FOR THE HANGER. - ALL DUCTS SUSPENDED BY HANGERS 12" OR LESS IN LENGTH FROM THE TOP OF THE DUCT TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SUPPORT FOR THE HANGER.

STRUCTURE ABOVE

STUD BRACING: 3-5/8" - 20 GA. METAL STUDS AT 6' O.C. MAX. IN BOTH DIRECTION OR AS INDICATED ON STUD BRACING DETAIL (WHICHEVER IS MOST RESTRITIVE). SECURE STUD TO PARTITION RUNNER TRICK AND TO STRUCTURE ABOVE.

20 GAGE 1-1/4" LEG TRACK @ TOP OF WALL

45.0

0°

6"-1

2"

MAIN RUNNER

POP RIVET - 2 ADJACENT SIDES ONLY

CROSS RUNNER

STRUT STABILIZER OR SIMILAR DEVICE

PERIMETER WALL PERIMETER WALL

CROSS TEE SLOT

PLAN DIAGRAMN.T.S.

LAY-IN CEILING

SECTION DIAGRAMN.T.S.

B B

A

A

A-A SECTION DIAGRAMN.T.S.B-B

45°

MAX.

NOTE:

A. CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C635-04 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR THE MANUFACTURE, PERFORMANCE, AND TESTING OF METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE AND LAY-IN PANEL CEILINGS & ASTM C636-04 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION OF METAL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE AND LAY-IN PANELS B. CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASCE 7, "MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES" : SECTION 9, "EARTHQUAKE LOADS."C. HANGER WIRES SHOWN ARE IN ADDITION TO TYPICAL CEILING SUSPENSION WIRES.D. DO NOT HANG CEILING SYSTEM OFF OF DUCTWORK.E. THIS HORIZONTAL RESTRAINT IS NOT REQUIRED FOR ROOM SIZES LESS THAN 144 S.F. WHERE SURROUNDING WALLS/PARTITIONS CONNECT DIRECTLY TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE.F. THE MAIN AND CROSS RUNNERS SHALL BE TIED TOGETHER TO PREVENT TWISTING.G. PROVIDE NO. 12 GAUGE VERTICAL SUPPORT WIRES ARE NEEDED IN THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS:

1. 4' ON CENTER SPACING ALONG THE MAIN RUNNER.2. LIGHT FIXTURES MUST BE POSITIVELY ATTACHED TO THE CEILING GRID WITH AN ATTACHMENT CAPABLE OF CARRYING 100% OF THE WEIGHT OF THE LIGHT FIXTURE LIGHT FIXTURES WEIGHING UP TO 56 POUNDS REQUIRE TWO VERTICAL SUPPORT WIRES. THESE WIRES MAY BE SLACK. LIGHT FIXTURES WEIGHING MORE THAN 56 POUNDS SHALL REQUIRE INDEPENDENT SUPPORT FROM THE SHELL BUILDING STRUCTURE ABOVE THE CEILING.3. MECHANICAL AIR TERMINALS WEIGHING LESS THAN 20 POUNDS SHALL BE POSITIVELY ATTACHED TO THE CEILING GRID. AIR TERMINALS WEIGHING 20 POUNDS BUT NOT MORE THAN 56 POUNDS SHALL BE SECURED TO THE SHELL BUILDING STRUCTURE ABOVE THE CEILING IN ADDITION TO ATTACHING THE AIR TERMINAL TO THE CEILING GRID. THESE TWO NO. 12 GAUGE WIRES MAY BE SLACK. AIR TERMINALS WEIGHING MORE THAN 56 POUNDS SHALL REQUIRE INDEPENDENT SUPPORT FROM THE SHELL BUILDING STRUCTURE ABOVE THE CEILING.

H. SPRINKLER HEADS AND OTHER PENETRATIONS OF THE SUSPENDED CEILING SHALL HAVE A 2" OVERSIZE RING, SLEEVE, OR ADAPTOR TO ALLOW 1" HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT IN ALL DIRECTIONS.I. ALL WALL PARTITIONS GREATER THAN 6' IN HEIGHT SHALL BE INDEPENDENTLY BRACED TO THE BUILDING SHELL STRUCTURE. WALL PARTITIONS MAY NOT BE SUPPORTED BY THE BRACED SUSPENDED CEILING ALONE.J. IN ADDITION TO ITEMS F THROUGH I ABOVE, SUSPENDED CEILINGS EXCEEDING 1,000 SQUARE FEET IN AREA REQUIRE FOUR NO. 12 GAUGE SPLAY WIRES AND A RIGID VERTICAL COMPRESSION STRUT EVERY 12 FEET ON CENTER STARTING A MAXIMUM OF 6 FEET FROM EACH WALL. THE SPLAY WIRES SHALL BE SECURED TO THE MAIN RUNNER WITHIN 2 INCHES OF THE CROSS RUNNER INTERSECTION AND SPLAYED 90 DEGREES FROM EACH OTHER AT AN ANGLE NOT EXCEEDING 45 DEGREES FROM THE PLANE OF THE CEILING.K. IN ADDITION TO ITEMS F THROUGH J ABOVE, SUSPENDED CEILINGS EXCEEDING 2,500 SQUARE FEET SHALL HAVE A SEPARATION JOINT OR A FULL HEIGHT WALL PARTITION SEPARATING THE SUSPENDED CEILING INTO AREAS LESS THAN 2,500 SQUARE FEET. REFER TO CEILING SEPERATION JOINT DETAIL.

CEILING SEPERATE JOINT DETAIL

FACE MOLDING PERMANF. RECOMMENDATIONS

CHANNEL MOLDING

NOTE! REFER TO RCP FOR LOCATIONS OF JOINTS AS REQ'D

HEAVY DUTY T-BAR GRID SYSTEM

12 GAGE WIRES (4 TOTAL) DIAGONALLY INSTALLED AS SHOWN @ 12'-0" O.C. (IN BOTH DIRECTIONS) AND 6'-0" MAX. FROM WALLS.

CEILING BRACING DETAIL

STRUT / TENSION POST ANCHORED TOMAIN TEE & STRUCT. ABOVE BY CEILINGINSTALLER

2" CLOSURE ANGLE2" CLOSURE ANGLE

VERTICAL STRUT DETAIL

ROOF STRUCTURE

3 5/8" 20 GA. (MIN)

VERTICAL STRUT:LESS THAN 6FT = 1" DIA. SCHEDULE 40 CONDUIT GREATER THAN 6FT LESS THAN 16 FT = (2) 2 1/2" 20 GA. (MIN) STUDS

SUSPENDED CEILING

ATTACH STRUT TOGRID PER CEILINGMANF. RECOMMENDATIONS

12 GA. HANGER WIREATTACHED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE OR TO PERIMETER WALL (NO GREATER THAN 1 IN 6 OUT-OF-PLUMB)

STRUT STABILIZER OR SIMILAR DEVICE

WIRES SHALL BE SECURED 2"MAX. FROM INTERSECTION OFMAIN RUNNER AND CROSSRUNNER

POP RIVET - 2 ADJACENTSIDES ONLY

12 GA. HANGER WIRE ATTACHED TOSTRUCTURE ABOVE OR TO PERIMETER WALL(NO GREATER THAN 1 IN 6OUT-OF-PLUMB)

1.5" MIN.

8" MAX. 8" MAX.

1.5" MIN.

45° MAX.

45° MAX.

45° MAX.

8" MAX.8" MAX.

3/4"

8" MAX. 8" MAX. 3/4"

12 GA. HANGER WIREATTACHED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE OR TO PERIMETER WALL (NO GREATER THAN 1 IN 6 OUT-OF-PLUMB)

EXHAUST FAN

DOWNLIGHT - SEE SPEC.

1X4 FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE

NIGHTLIGHT/ EMERGENCY 1X4 FLUORESCENTLIGHT FIXTURE w/ 60 MIN. BATTERY BACKUP

EXIT LIGHT/EMERGENCYLIGHT

VANITY WALL SCONCE

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A120REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

18-009

CMB

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 SECOND FLOOR RCP

SCALE: 12" = 1'-0"9 'D' CATEGORY - SEISMIC BRACING @ PART.

SCALE: 12" = 1'-0"2 'D' CATEGORY - SEISMIC BRACING CEILING DETAIL

RCP GENERAL NOTES:

A. COORDINATE BALANCE OF ALL LIGHTING, CEILINGS, HVAC, ETC. WITH DESIGN/BUILD AND TENANT FINISH, UNDER SEPARATE PACKAGE.

B. ALL EXPOSED GYP. BOARD CEILINGS TO BE PAINTED

RCP KEYED NOTES:

1. 5/8" GYP. BD. CEILING

2. 2x4 SECOND LOOK LAY-IN CEILING & SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM - COORDINATE FINAL PRODUCTS AND GRID LAYOUT WITH TENANT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

3. EXHAUST FAN. RE: MECHANICAL DESIGN/BUILD

##

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"

RCP LEGEND

C F

6

8

D E

5

7

INSIDE CLEAR

8' - 6"

INSI

D E C

LEAR

7' - 2

"

5' - 2" 9 T @ 11" = 8' - 3"

INTERMEDIATE LANDING

5' - 3"

INSI

D E S

TRIN

GER,

CLE

AR

3' - 8

" 10

"

INSI

D E S

TRIN

GER,

CLE

AR

3' - 8

"

8' - 6

"

UP TO INTERMEDIATE LANDING

9 T @ 11" = 8' - 3"

2A303

EQ. 3' - 6" EQ.

4' - 1

1/8"

4' - 9

5/8"

101J1

J1

L1

L1

J1

J1

L1

J1

STAIR A101

12A303

FEC

13

C F

11

12

D E

4A303

UP

7' - 0" 9 T @ 11" = 8' - 3"


5' - 1"

UP TO INTERMEDIATE LANDING

9 T @ 11" = 8' - 3"

INSI

D E S

TRIN

GER,

CLE

AR

3' - 8

"10

"

INSI

D E S

TRIN

GER,

CLE

AR

3' - 8

"

8' - 6

"1'

- 1 1/

8"

102

J1

J1

J1

J1

J1

J1

J1

K1

K1

STAIR B102

4

A304

FEC

2

A B

38"

8"

4' - 0

"

8"

1' - 6

"

1' - 6"

1' - 6"

1' - 6

"

2' - 6

3/8"

2' - 2

"


DECORATIVE CAST STONE VENEER, BELOW

CAST STONE SILL



1" LOW-E INSULATED GLASS IN ALUM. STOREFRONT FRAME, RE: ELEVS.

20A302

C F

6A301

6

8

D E

5

7

UP

UP


5' - 2" 8 T @ 11" = 7' - 4"

TOP LANDING

6' - 2"

INSI

D E S

TRIN

GER,

CLE

AR

3' - 8

" 10

"

INSI

D E S

TRIN

GER,

CLE

AR

3' - 8

"

8' - 6

"8'

- 6"

J1

J1

L1

L1

L1

L1

J1

J1

201

STAIR A101

12A303

13

A303

Sim

13

A303

Sim

13

A303

Sim13

A303

Sim

INSIDE CLEAR

8' - 6"

INSI

D E C

LEAR

7' - 2

"

7' - 6

7/8"

15' - 4 7/8"

FEC

13

C F

11

12

D E

4A303


6' - 0 1/2" 8 T @ 11" = 7' - 4"

LANDING

6' - 2 1/2"UP

UP

INSI

D E S

TRIN

GER,

CLE

AR

3' - 8

"

INSI

D E S

TRIN

GER,

CLE

AR

3' - 8

"

STAIR B102

202

13

A303

Sim

13

A303

Sim

J1

J1

J1

J1

J1

K1

4

A304

10"

SECOND FLOOR116' - 8"

CD

VWC

J4

CT-1

125' - 8"

120' - 8"WAINSCOT

CLG. HT.

CB-1


VWC

CB-1

NOTE:SEE 16/A011 FOR

MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND FIXTURE SCHEDULE

CT-1

125' - 8"

120' - 8"

WAINSCOT

CLG. HT.


C D

J4


MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND FIXTURE SCHEDULECT-1

CLG. HT.

CB-1

125' - 8"



MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND FIXTURE SCHEDULEVWC

CT-1

WAINSCOT

CLG. HT.

CB-1

125' - 8"

120' - 8"

CT-1 TILE (TBD)

VWC VINYL WALL COVERING (TBD)

CB-1 TILE BASE (TBD)

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A130ENLARGED PLANS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"14 STAIR A - FIRST FLOOR PLAN

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"5 STAIR B - FIRST FLOOR PLAN


SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"16 STAIR A - SECOND FLOOR PLAN

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"7 STAIR B - SECOND FLOOR FLAN

SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"1 TOILET ROOM ELEVATION, TYP.




MATERIAL LEGEND



T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

T.O. MASONRY129' - 4"

T.O. STONE102' - 8"

EIFS-1

S-1

B-1

SF-1CS-1

CS-1

M-1BEYOND

EIFS-1

S-1

B-1

EIFS-1

CS-1

B-1

S-1

CS-1

B-1

AWN-1

L-1

16A302

12A302

SIM.8

A302

SIM.

CJ CJ

4 4

1TYP.

T.O. MANSARD143' - 4"

CS-2

M-2

M-2



T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

4A302


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

EIFS-1

S-1

B-1

SF-1 CS-1

CS-1

M-1

EIFS-1 BEYOND

BEYOND

CS-1B-1

EIFS-1

CS-1

B-1

S-1

M-1

EIFS-1BEYOND

BEYOND

20A302

SIM.20A303

CJ CJ

1 1

1TYP.

A01016


5TYP.

CS-2

M-2

M-2

6TYP.



T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

EIFS-1

S-1

B-1

SF-1CS-1

CS-1

M-1 BEYOND

EIFS-1S-1

B-1

EIFS-1

CS-1

B-1

S-1

CS-1

B-1

AWN-1

L-1

8A302

12A302

SIM.SIM.16

A302

1

1

CJ CJ

1


5

5

TYP.

M-2

CS-1

P-1

CS-2

CS-2

EXTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LEGENDCODE MATERIAL TYPE / COLOR

M-1 STANDING-SEAMMETAL ROOF

UNA-CLADCOLOR: "DARK BRONZE"

S-1 SLATE SHINGLE BASE BID: GAF - CAMELOT & CAMELOT II, COLOR: TBDCERTAINTEED - GRAND MANOR, COLOR: TBD

ALT. BID: GAF - TRUSLATE, COLOR: TBDBRAVA SLATE TILE, COLOR: TBD

B-1 BRICK BASE BID: HEBRON "CASTLEWOOD" - CLOSURE SIZEALT BID: ENDICOTT "BURGUNDY SANDS" - CLOSURE SIZE

EIFS-1 EIFS DRYVIT, SANDPEPPLE TEXTURECOLOR: TO MATCH CS-1/CS-2

SF-1 ALUM. STOREFRONT 1" CLEAR LOW-E INSUL. GLASS IN SATIN BLACK ANODIZED ALUM. STOREFRONT

L-1 LIGHT FIXTURE TBD

CS-1 CAST STONE CONTINENTAL CAST STONECOLOR: 1103

T = TEMPERED GLASS

AWN-1 CANOPY LAWRENCE FABRICS & METAL STRUCTURESCOLOR: MATCH M-1

CJ = CONTROL JOINT

CS-2 ARRISCRAFT INTERNATIONALCOLOR: "ROCKED OAK RIDGE", 8" x 16" FACE, 4" THICK

DECORATIVE CAST STONE VENNER

M-2 SHEET MTL TRIM, GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS, ETC.

UNA-CLADCOLOR: "DARK BRONZE"



T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

4A302

8A302

12A302


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

EIFS-1

S-1

B-1

SF-1CS-1

CS-1

M-1

EIFS-1BEYOND

BEYOND

CS-1 AWN-1

EIFS-1

S-1

L-1 L-1

EIFS-1

CS-1

B-1

S-1

M-1

EIFS-1 BEYOND

BEYOND

20A302

B-1

A01011

1 1

1TYP.

CJ CJ


M-2 CS-1 P-1

CS-2

M-2

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A201EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"11 NORTH ELEVATION (SIDE)

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"10 WEST ELEVATION (REAR)

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"9 SOUTH ELEVATION (SIDE)

ELEVATIONS KEYED NOTES1. PRE-FINISHED SHT. MTL. SCUPPER & DOWNSPOUT.

2. GAS METER; SEE MEP DESIGN/BUILD DRAWINGS.

3. ELECTRIC METER; SEE MEP DESIGN/BUILD DRAWINGS.

4. RECESSED EXTERIOR CAN LIGHTS; SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN (6/A201)

5. 1" EIFS REVEAL, ALIGN WITH EDGE OF WINDOW. SEE DETAIL 8/A011.

6. SPANDREL GLAZING, SHOWN WITH HATCH. (TYP. @ 3 LOCATIONS)

##

GENERAL NOTESA. ALL CONTROL JOINTS TO BE 1/2" IN WIDTH, TYPICAL.

B. PAINT ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT, PIPING, AND ELECTRICAL CABINETS ON EXTERIOR OF BUILDING TO MATCH WALL.

SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"12 EAST ELEVATION (FRONT)



T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

13 9 23681112 5710 1

125' - 8" 125' - 8"

128' - 8"

112' - 0"112' - 0"

CEILING HT. CEILING HT.CEILING HT.

CEILING HT.

CEILING HT. CEILING HT.

HOIST BEAM FOR ELEVATOR

TAPERED INS. SLOPED 1/2" / FT ON ROOF DECK ON BAR JOISTS. RE: STRUCT.


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

1/2" / 1'-0"

ROOF DRAINS, SEE ROOF PLAN & DETAIL 13/A011

12A303

10" / 1'-0

"

A30313

SimA30313

Sim

A30313

Sim

A3028


A3012

SimA301

2Sim

125' - 8"



T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

A B C F G H

8A301

D E

RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK ON BAR JOISTS. RE: STRUCT.

MANSARD TRUSS AND ARCHED DORMERS TO BE LIGHT GAUGE OVERFRAMING

SLOPE 1/4" / 1'-0" MIN. SLOPE 1/4" / 1'-0" MIN.

CEILING HT.

4-1/2" CONC. DECK ON W-SECTION, PURLING @ +/- 5'-0" O.C.

128' - 8"

125' - 8"

128' - 8"

112' - 0" 112' - 0"CEILING HT.

CEILING HT.

CEILING HT.

CEILING HT.


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

A303217

' - 0 3

/8"

[No Slope]

10" / 1'-0"

10" / 1'-0

"

20A303

A30212

SIM

A30212

SIM


A3012

A3012

Sim


TRUSS, BY OTHERS

SLATE SHINGLE ROOFING ON SELF-ADHESIVE FELT ON E.G. PLYWOOD SHEATHING

PRE-FIN. SHEET METAL RIDGE CAP. INSTALL PER MANF.

ROOFING MEMBRANE ON E.G. PLYWOOD SHEATHING.

EXTEND UP WALL AND UNDER RIDGE CAP

TPO ROOF MEMBRANE ON R-20 RIGID INSULATION ON MTL.

DECK. RE: STRUCTURAL

GRAVITY VENT

8" M

IN

WEATHER PROOF ACCESS DOOR

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A301BUILDING SECTIONS

18-009

CMB

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 EAST / WEST BUILDING SECTION

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"6 NORTH / SOUTH BUILDING SECTIONSCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"2 MANSARD ROOF DETAIL



T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

2' - 8

"

R.O.

7' - 4

"9'

- 4"

R.O.

7' - 4

"2'

- 8"

4' - 6

"1'

- 4"

3

1' - 0

"1'

- 4"

1' - 0

"1'

- 2"

2"


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

SLOPE SIDEWALK 1/4"/FT AWAY FROM BUILDING, TYP.

CAST STONE BASE ON CMU BLOCK. SEE STRUCT.

SET STOREFRONT IN CONT. HEAVY BEAD OF DOW-CORNING 756 SEALANT, AS REQUIRED TO BRIDGE ANY GAPS CAUSED BY VARIATIONS IN CONC. FLOR. SHIM AS REQ. PROVIDE BACKER ROD & SEALANT, BOTH SIDES, TYP.


SHIM AS REQUIRED, PROVIDE BACKER ROD & SEALANT, BOTH SIDES, TYP.


DECORATIVE CAST STONE OVER 2" AIRSPACE ON FLUID APPLIED BARRIER ON E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL. STUDS. SEE STRUCT.


EIFS ON FLUID APPLIED BARRIER ON E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL. STUDS. SEE STRUCT.

1' - 3 3/8"





A30417

A3049

A30420

11 3/4"

A3048

A3049

R-19 BATT INSULATION

11 3/4"

1' - 6"

6 1/4"



23

29' -

4"VA

RIES

1' - 0

"1'

- 4"

1' - 0

"


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

2"

4" CONC. SLAB ON VAPOR BARRIER ON

6" COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL, RE:

STRUCT. DWGS. 1/2" COMPRESSION FILLER W/ SEALANT, TYP.

2" PERIMETER INSULATION, TYP.



SOLDIER COURSE ACCENT

2" EIFS ON FLUID APPLIED BARRIER ON E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL. STUDS. SEE STRUCT.

11 3/4"

3' - 3 3/8"

1/2" INSET, TYP.


A30412

A30419

3 5/8"

STRUCTURAL TO PROVIDE STEEL FOR CANOPY ATTACHMENT, BEYOND.

A3046

3' - 6"

3' - 0 3/8"


5 5/8"


2

R.O.

VAR

IES,

SEE

ELE

VATI

ON

10' -

3 1/2"

AT

PEAK

VARI

ES7'

- 4"

2' - 8

"

5' - 3

1/2"

2' - 0

1/2"

1' - 8

"1'

- 0"

3


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

4" CONC. SLAB ON VAPOR BARRIER ON 6"

COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL, RE:

STRUCT. DWGS.


2" PERIMETER INSULATION, TYP.



3' - 3 3/8"

11 3/4"




1' - 0

"VA

RIES

2' - 0

"





DIRECT APPLIED EIFS ON 5/8" E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL. STUDS. SEE STRUCT.

2"

A3043

A3046

1' - 3 3/8"

A30420

A3049




T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

H


T.O. STONE102' - 8"






11 3/4" 10 5/8"

11 3/4"

1' - 6"

1' - 2

"1'

- 0"

1' - 4

"1'

- 0"

26' -

8"2'

- 8"

2"

2"

1' - 3 3/8"

PIER, BEYOND

9"

A30412

SIM

A30417

SIM




T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

2


T.O. STONE102' - 8"





CAST STONE SILL AND BASE ON MTL STUD. SEE STRUCT.


1/2" INSET, TYP.

11 3/4"

1' - 2

"1'

- 0"

1' - 4

"1'

- 0"

26' -

8"2'

- 8"

2"

2' - 2"

2' - 6 3/8"

1' - 11 1/2"

A30412

SIM

1' - 7 7/8"

A30417

SIM


1' - 7 7/8" 10 5/8"DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A302WALL SECTIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"4 WALL SECTIONSCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"12 WALL SECTION

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"8 WALL SECTIONSCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"16 WALL SECTION

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"20 WALL SECTION @ PIER



C F

8A301

D E

(9) TREADS @ 11" EA. = 8' - 3"5' - 2"


5' - 3"(9) TREADS @ 11" EA. = 8' - 3"


5' - 2"

(8) TREADS @ 11" EA. = 7' - 4"

TOP LANDING

6' - 2"

(9) R

ISER

S @

± 7"

=

5' - 2

"

(10)

RIS

ERS

@ ±

7" =

5' - 9

"

(10)

RIS

ERS

@ ±

7" =

5' - 9

"

A01119

Sim

A01119

Sim

19

A011

Sim

A01115

Sim

A30313

Sim

4

A304



CF

8A301

DE


5' - 3 1/2"

(2) FLIGHTS

(9) TREADS @ 11" EA. = 8' - 3" 7' - 0"


6' - 0 1/2"(8) TREADS @ 11" EA. = 7' - 4"

TOP LANDING

6' - 2 1/2"

102A

202

(9) TREADS @ 11" EA. = 8' - 3"

A01115

Sim

A01119

Sim

A01119

Sim

1' - 0"

19

A011

Sim

A30313

Sim

4

A304



T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

1312


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

1' - 2 7/8"

1' - 6 1/2"

1' - 9 1/8"

1' - 2 7/8"1/2" COMPRESSION FILLER W/ SEALANT, TYP.





DOWNSPOUT & PIER, BEYOND

A30412

SIM

A30417

SIM


10 5/8"

3 5/8"

6 1/4"



8A301

D E

INSIDE CLEAR

8' - 6"

HOIST BEAM @ ROOF DECK,SEE STRUCT.

A30313

A30313

Sim

ELEVATOR PIT FOUNDATION, COORD. W/ ELEVATOR MFR. ON PIT, HOISTING, & OVERHEAD CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS.RE: STRUCT. DWGS.

ELEVATOR SUMP PIT PER MANF., RE: STRUCT. DWGS.

1-HOUR FIRE RATED GYP. BOARD CONTINUOUS TO DECK

ELEVATOR SHAFT, 1-HOUR FIRE RATED

A01111

Sim

A01111

Sim

1 HOUR FIRE RATED GYP.

BOARD, CONTINUOUS

3/8" TYP. CONC. SLAB ON MTL. DECK,SEE STRUCT.

STRUCT. BEAM, SEE STRUCT.

1 HOUR FIRE RATED GYP. BOARD, CONTINUOUS TO DECK

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A303WALL SECTIONS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"2 STAIR A - SECTION

SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"4 STAIR B - SECTIONSCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"20 WALL SECTION

SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"12 WALL SECTION

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"13 EDGE OF SLAB DETAIL

T.O. GUTTER133' - 10"

3

11 3/4"

1' - 3 3/8" 2 5/8" 2" 2" 6"

1' - 0

" 4"

6"8"

SLATE SHINGLE ON ROOFING MEMBRANE ON E.G. PLYWOOD SHEATING ON MTL FRAMING. RE: STRUCT. DWGS

PRE-FINISHED MTL. FASCIA & GUTTER WITH WD. BLKG. AS REQ'D.

CONTINUE ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER WD. BLOCKING & UNDER FASCIA

T.O. WINDOW126' - 8"

6 1/4" 1"

10"

6"

BRICK VENEER OVER AIR/MOISTURE BARRIER OVER 5/8" E.G. PLYWOOD

CONTINUOUS MORTAR NET

CAST STONE BAND WITH CONT. DRIP EDGE

THRU-WALL FLASHING WITH WEEPS @ 16" O.C.


STEEL LINTEL, PAINTED. SEE STRUCTURAL

6 1/4" 4 1/2" 2 1/8"

5/8" GYP. BD OVER METAL STUDS WITH

CONT. BATT INSULATION

MTL STUD HEADER, RE: STRUCTURAL

4 5/8" 1/2" 1/2"

1' - 4

"

1/4"

KEYSTONE, BEYOND

7 1/2"

1/2"

1' - 0 7/8"

6 1/4" 1"






BACKER ROD & SEALANT. SHIM AS REQ'D.

SOLID SURFACE SILL WITH EASED EDGE

MTL PAN FLASHING SET IN CONT. BED OF

SEALANT - BY WINDOW MANUF.,

TYP.

4 5/8"

8"


T.O. STONE102' - 8"



5/8" GYP. BD OVER METAL STUDS WITH CONT. BATT

INSULATION

BACKER ROD & SEALANT. SHIM AS REQ'D.

SOLID SURFACE SILL WITH EASED EDGE

MTL PAN FLASHING SET IN CONT. BED OF SEALANT -

BY WINDOW MANUF., TYP.

1' - 0 7/8"

6 1/4" 4 1/2" 2 1/8"

DECORATIVE CAST STONE VENEER ON 4" CMU OVER AIR/MOISTURE BARRIER OVER E.G. PLYWOOD ON METAL STUDS


7 1/2"

1/2"

1"

10" CMU BLOCK TO ALIGN WITH STONE BASE. GROUTED SOLID TO FOOTING

CONC. SLAB TO ALIGN WITH FACE OF MTL. STUD. RE: STRUCT.

8"

3" 8 5/8"


T.O. STONE102' - 8"

TYP.

1' - 8

"

TYP.4"

1/2"

7 1/2"

1/2" INSET

1"

2 3/8" 8 5/8"

CONC. SLAB TO ALIGN WITH FACE

OF MTL. STUD. RE: STRUCT.


10" CMU BLOCK TO ALIGN WITH STONE BASE, GROUTED SOLID TO FOOTING


DECORATIVE CAST VENEER ON CMU GROUTED SOLID

CAST STONE SILL WITH CONT. DRIP EDGE

THRU-WALL FLASHING


8"

5 5/8"

2


1/2" INSET, TYP.


8"

TYP.

1' - 8

"4"

EIFS DRAINAGE SYSTEM ON 5/8" E.G. PLYWOOD ON MTL STUDS. RE: STRUCT. DWGS

MEMBRANE FLASHING

2" TYP.

1' - 0

"1/2

"

T.O. WINDOW126' - 8"

3



CONTINUOUS MORTAR NET




STEEL ANGLE, PAINTED. SEE STRUCTURAL

5/8" GYP. BD OVER METAL STUDS WITH CONT. BATT INSULATION



10"

6"1'

- 4"

11 3/4"

1' - 3 3/8"

2"

1' - 0

"

2"

1"

MTL STUD HEADER, RE: STRUCTURAL

6 1/4"

KEYSTONE, BEYOND

1/2"

1' - 3

1/2"

2' - 4

"

1/4"

1/2" 1/2"

11

7" M

IN.

11" MIN.

109' - 5 1/4"VARIES

T.O. GYP

5/8" GYP. BD. ENCLOSURE

2x WD. BLKG.STRUCTURAL TUBE BRACING,

RE: STRUCT.

J1

2

2' - 0

"

4"8"

1' - 0

"

1"

1"

7"

2" EIFS ON FLUID APPLIED BARRIER ON E.G./F.T. PLYWOOD ON MTL. STUDS. RE: STRUCT.

STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF ON ROOFING MEMBRANE ON

E.G. PLYWOOD ON MTL FRAMING. RE: STRUCT.

METAL FLASHING OVER ROOF MEMBRANE.

MIN.2"

3"

DWG BY

TR,i PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR,i

Arc

hite

cts

AR

CH

ITE

CT

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

CLI

EN

T

A304WALL SECTION DETAILS

18-009

cmb

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AYL

IGH

T C

IRC

LES

T. L

OU

IS C

OU

NTY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

AE

dific

a C

ase

Eng

inee

ring

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"17 SECTION @ MANSARD

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"9 SECTION @ CAST STONE BAND

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"20 SECTION @ CAST STONE BANDSCALE: 3" = 1'-0"8 SECTION @ BASE

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"12 ENLARGED SECTION



SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"4 ENCLOSURE DETAIL @ STAIR B

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"6 SECTION @ BARREL ROOF

BUILDING CODES AND STANDARDS USED FOR DESIGN1. INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2009 EDITION

OCCUPANCY CATEGORY: IIDESIGN LOADS1. DESIGN LOADS

2ND FLOOR LIVE LOAD: 100 psf2ND FLOOR DEAD LOAD: 60 psfROOF LIVE LOAD: 20 psfROOF DEAD LOAD: 20 psf

2. SNOW LOAD DESIGN CRITERIASNOW LOAD IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I: 1.00GROUND SNOW LOAD, Pg: 20 psfFLAT ROOF SNOW LOAD. Pf: 14 psfTHERMAL FACTOR, Ct: 1.00 (STL JST); 1.20 (MANSARD TRUSS)EXPOSURE FACTOR, Ce: 1.00FROST DEPTH: 2'-6"

3. WIND LOAD DESIGN CRITERIAWIND IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I: 1.00BASIC WIND SPEED: 90 MPH (3 SEC GUST)WIND EXPOSURE CATEGORY: BGCpi: +/- 0.18POSITIVE WIND ROOF PRESSURES (ASD VALUES):

- ZONE 1 (STL JST) 10 psf- ZONE 2 & 3 (STL JST) 12 psf

NET UPLIFT VALUES (ASD VALUES):- ZONE 1 (STL JST) 9 psf- ZONE 2 (STL JST) 12 psf- ZONE 3 (STL JST) 12 psf- 'a' DIMENSION 7.5 ft

4. SEISMIC LOAD DESIGN CRITERIASEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I: 1.00SITE CLASS: DSPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATION: Ss=0.540g, S1=0.180gSPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFFICIENTS: Sds=0.492g, Sd1=0.250gSEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY: DBASIC SEISMIC-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM: SPECIAL STEEL CONCENTRICALLY

BRACED FRAMES/DUAL SYSTEM w/ INTERMEDIATE STEEL MOMENT FRAMES RESISTING MIN OF 25% SEISMIC FORCES

SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT, Cs: 0.082/0.062RESPONSE MODIFICATION FACTOR, R: 6/6SYSTEM OVER-STRENGTH FACTOR, OMEGAo: 2/2.5DEFLECTION AMPLIFICATION FACTOR, Cd: 5/5ANALYSIS PROCEDURE USED: EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE

DEFERRED SUBMITTALS

THE FOLLOWING DESIGN ELEMENTS MUST BE SIGNED & SEALED BY A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (PE/SE) REGISTERED IN THE STATE WHERE THIS PROJECT IS LOCATED, AND SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. DESIGNED DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND RECORD.1. STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTION CALCULATIONS AND SHOP FABRICATION DRAWINGS FOR

CONNECTIONS.2. STEEL JOIST CALCULATIONS AND FABRICATION DRAWINGS (INCLUDING ACCESSORIES).3. LIGHT GAUGE COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING:

A. STUDS, JOISTS, HEADERS, AND CONNECTIONS NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.B. STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS INCLUDING MEMBER SIZES, LAYOUT, SPAN, SPACING, DEFLECTION,

AND TYPICAL & SPECIAL CONNECTIONS.4. PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSS CALCULATIONS, AND FABRICATION DRAWINGS

INCLUDING:A. ALL TRUSS-TO-TRUSS CONNECTIONSB. ALL TRUSS-TO-STRUCTURE CONNECTIONSC. PLAN AND DETAILS FOR THE LOCATIONS OF ALL ERECTION/TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT LATERAL

AND DIAGONAL BRACING AND/OR BLOCKING.D. FRAMING PLAN LAYOUT (DIMENSIONED AND TO SCALE)E. IDENTITY OF THE COMPANY MANUFACTURING THE TRUSSF. DESIGN LOADSG. TRUSS SPACING

5. STEEL STAIR CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS INCLUDING STRINGERS, LANDINGS, AND HANDRAIL MEMBERS AND CONNECTION DESIGN.

6. CANOPY STRUCTURAL STEEL DRAWINGS & CALCULATIONS FOR MEMBER SIZES & CONNECTIONS.

GENERAL REVIT NOTES

1. FOR ARCHITECTURAL, MEP, & STRUCTURAL COORDINATION: MODELED ELEMENTS SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SUCH AS TRUSSES, OPEN-WEB JOISTS, AND JOIST GIRDERS, ARE NOT THE FINAL DESIGN AND ALL FINAL COORDINATION SHOULD BE DONE BY THE VARIOUS CONSTRUCTION TRADES PER SHOP DRAWINGS FOR THESE ELEMENTS OF THE STRUCTURE.

GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES

1. THIS DRAWING SET IS TO BE VIEWED AS A WHOLE AND COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, CIVIL, AND OTHER DISCIPLINES. ALL WORK PERTAINING TO A SPECIFIC CONTRACTOR MAY OR MAY NOT BE SHOWN ON SPECIFIC DRAWING SECTIONS. IT IS EACH SUBCONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PREPARE HIS BID FROM A COMPLETE SET OF PLANS.

2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FOLLOW WRITTEN DIMENSIONS ONLY. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN ON PLAN TO BE COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS.

3. ALL DETAILS AND SECTIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO BE TYPICAL AND SHALL APPLY AT ANY SIMILAR SITUATION ELSEWHERE ON THE JOB, EXCEPT WHERE A DIFFERENT DETAIL OR SECTION IS SHOWN.

4. THE STRUCTURE SHALL BE ADEQUATELY BRACED AND SHORED DURING ERECTION AGAINST WIND AND ERECTION LOADS. STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ARE DESIGNED FOR "IN-PLACE" LOADS ONLY.

5. BRACE ALL BELOW GRADE WALLS UNTIL FLOOR STRUCTURE IS IN PLACE & CONCRETE OR PLYWOOD FLOOR DIAPHRAGM IS IN PLACE.

6. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL OPENING SIZES, PAD SIZES, AND LOCATIONS WITH THE RESPECTIVE CONTRACTORS.

7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS.

8. THE VARIOUS SUBCONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR PLACING SLEEVES, OUTLET BOXES, ANCHORS, VENT OPENINGS, ETC. THAT MAY BE REQUIRED IN FOUNDATION WALLS. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER SHALL COORDINATE ALL PLACEMENT OF ITEMS IN FOUNDATION WALLS.

9. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS AND INFORMATION.10. ALL ELEVATIONS GIVEN ARE REFERENCED TO FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATIONS AT 100'-0", UNLESS SHOWN

AS USGS ELEVATIONS.11. WHERE GENERAL NOTES OR TYPICAL DETAILS CONTRADICT INFORMATION PROVIDED IN BUILDING

SECTIONS, THE BUILDING SECTIONS TAKE PRECEDENCE.12. ALL HOLES THROUGH CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE CORE DRILLED OR SAWCUT.13. ALL STAIR STRINGERS, LANDINGS, AND HANDRAILS TO BE DESIGNED AND FABRICATED BY STAIR

FABRICATOR.14. WHERE INFORMATION PROVIDED IN THESE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS CONTRADICTS INFORMATION

PROVIDED IN BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS, THE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE.

SHOP DRAWING NOTES

1. SHOP DRAWINGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS.

2. PRIOR SUBMITTAL, THE CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT SHALL REVIEW THE SHOP DRAWINGS AND MAKE ANY CORRECTIONS REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT SHALL STAMP AND SIGN THE DRAWINGS, INDICATING THAT THEY HAVE REVIEWED THEM, PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL TO ENGINEER.

3. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE FURNISHED FOR ALL STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.4. STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF AEDIFICA CASE ENGINEERING. REPRODUCTION OF

STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR USE IN SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS IS NOT ACCEPTABLE WITHOUT OUR WRITTEN AGREEMENT.

5. SCHEDULE SHALL ALLOW A MINIMUM OF 2 WEEKS FROM RECEIPT OF SHOP DRAWINGS FOR AEDIFICA CASE ENGINEERING TO PROVIDE RESPONSE.

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

1. REFER TO THE "STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS" FOR THE LIST OF ELEMENTS OF CONSTRUCTION THAT SHALL REQUIRE SPECIAL INSPECTION. THIS SHALL BE CONSIDERED A GUIDE, AND THE CONTRACTOR AND INSPECTOR SHALL REFER TO THE IBC FOR COMPLETE REQUIREMENTS, QUALIFICATIONS, EXCEPTIONS, AND SUBMITTALS. REFER TO IBC SECTION 1704 FOR 2003-2009 CODES, AND SECTION 1705 FOR 2012-2015 CODES. THE OWNER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR EMPLOYING THE SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCY. ANY "OBSERVATIONS" BY THE EOR WILL NOT BE TO PERFORM SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND SHALL NOT BE INTERPRETED AS SUCH.

2. COPIES OF ALL INSPECTION REPORTS THAT REPORT COMPLIANCE SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT OF RECORD, STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD, AND BUILDING INSPECTOR WITHIN 7 CALENDAR DAYS OF COMPLETION OF THAT PORTION OF WORK. A MINIMUM OF ONE (1) PROGRESS REPORT PER MONTH FOR EACH TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE STRUCTUAL ENGINEER OF RECORD.

3. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL INFORM ENGINEER OF RECORD IMMEDIATELY OF NON-COMPLIANCE WITH CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OR APPROVED SUBMITTALS. CONTACT ENGINEER OF RECORD THE SAME DAY NON-COMPLIANCE IS DISCOVERED AND FOLLOW UP WITH AN OFFICIAL REPORT WITHIN 2 BUSINESS DAYS.

4. THE SPECIAL INSPECTIONS IDENTIFIED ON THE PLANS ARE IN ADDITION TO, AND NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR, THOSE INSPECTIONS REQUIRED TO BE PERFORMED BY A BUILDING INSPECTOR.

5. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS ARE NOTED AS EITHER "CONTINUOUS" OR "PERIODIC". A "CONTINUOUS" INSPECTION REQUIRES THE PRESENCE OF A QUALIFIED INSPECTOR IN THE VICINITY OF THE WORK BEING PERFORMED FOR 100% OF THAT WORK. A "PERIODIC" INSPECTION REQUIRES PART-TIME OBSERVATION OF THE WORK BEING PERFORMED. THE INSPECTOR SHALL ALSO OBSERVE THE FINAL CONDITION OF THE WORK BEFORE IT IS CLOSED FROM VIEW.

6. WHEN WORK IN MORE THAN ONE CATEGORY OF WORK REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION IS TO BE PERFORMED SIMULTANEOUSLY, OR THE GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION OF THE WORK IS SUCH THAT IT CANNOT BE CONTINUOUSLY OBSERVED, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE AGENT TO EMPLOY A SUFFICIENT NUMBER OF SPECIAL INSPECTORS TO ASSURE THAT ALL WORK IS CONTINUOUSLY INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THOSE PROVISIONS.

EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK NOTES

1. WATER LEVELS INDICATED ON THE BORING LOGS MAY BE SUBJECT TO SEASONAL AND/OR ANNUAL VARIATIONS. A DEWATERING SYSTEM OF SUFFICIENT CAPACITY SHALL BE INSTALLED AND OPERATED TO MAINTAIN THE CONSTRUCTION AREA FREE OF WATER AT ALL TIMES.

2. THE BEARING VALUE AND LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES OF THE SOILS IS PER REPORT BY: MIDWEST TESTING, DATED APRIL 4, 2018. THE FOUNDATION DESIGN IS BASED ON THE FOLLOWING NET ALLOWABLE BEARING AND LATERAL EARTH PRESSURES (ALLOWABLE BEARING PRESSURES MAY BE INCREASED BY 33 PERCENT FOR WIND AND SEISMIC LOADS):• SPREAD FOOTINGS 3,500 psf• CONT. WALL FOOTINGS 3,500 psf•

3. ALL FOOTING EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE INSPECTED, PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, BY A SOILS ENGINEER TO VERIFY SUITABLE BEARING MATERIAL OF CAPACITY AS SPECIFIED.

4. NOTIFY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE WHEN ADDITIONAL EXCAVATION IS REQUIRED TO REACH SUITABLE BEARING MATERIAL.

5. THE SOILS ENGINEER SHALL CERTIFY IN WRITING THAT ALL FOUNDATIONS WERE PLACED ON SOIL WITH THE BEARING VALUE AS SPECIFIED.

6. WITHIN THE EXCAVATION AREA OF FOUNDATIONS, ALL VEGETATION, TOPSOIL, PREVIOUSLY PLACED FILL AND UNSUITABLE SOILS SHALL BE REMOVED. ALL FOOTINGS TO BEAR ON VIRGIN SOIL OR PROPERLY PLACED AND COMPACTED ENGINEERED FILL.

7. FOUNDATION DESIGN DOES NOT ACCOUNT FOR WINTER CONSTRUCTION. ANY UNENCLOSED/UNHEATED SPACES SHALL BE ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AGAINST FROST DURING WINTER CONSTRUCTION BY THE CONTRACTOR.

8. IF ANY SOFT SPOTS OR AREAS QUESTIONABLE FOR ANY REASONS ARE ENCOUNTERED BY THE CONTRACTOR, ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY SO THAT ANY REQUIRED ACTION MAY BE TAKEN PRIOR TO CONTINUATION OF CONSTRUCTION IN THAT AREA.

CONCRETE NOTES

1. ALL CONCRETE WORK INCLUDING FORMING, REINFORCING, MIXING, PLACING, AND CURING SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ACI MANUAL OF CONCRETE PRACTICE INCLUDING "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE", ACI 318, AND "SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE", ACI 301 LATEST EDITIONS.

2. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MIX DESIGN SUPPLIER TO PROPORTION MIXES APPROPRIATELY TO REACH THE REQUIRED DESIGN STRENGTH NOTED, AND SHALL BE APPROPRIATE FOR THEIR INTENDED USE. ADMIXTURES ARE OPTIONAL. HOWEVER, AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURES SHALL BE USED FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO THE EXTERIOR OR FREEZE-THAW CYCLES.

3. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS FOR EACH INTENDED USE ON THE PROJECT FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. CONTENTS OF THE MIX DESIGN SHALL COMPLY WITH, AND INCLUDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY, ACI 318, CHAPTER 5. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO NUMBER OF TESTS AND AGE OF TESTS INCLUDED IN THE MIX DESIGN REPORT.

4. ALL CONCRETE DENSITY SHALL BE NORMAL WEIGHT (145 pcf +/- 5) UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE SHALL BE 110 pcf +/- 5, UNO.

5. FLY ASH ALLOWANCES:• 20% MAXIMUM BY WEIGHT IN FOOTINGS• 15% MAXIMUM BY WEIGHT IN SLABS

6. COORDINATE CONCRETE WORK WITH THAT OF OTHER TRADES TO ALLOW FOR SETTING OF SLEEVES, ACCESSORIES, ETC.

7. ALL REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHOR RODS, DOWELS, AND INSETS SHALL BE WELL-SECURED IN POSITION PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE.

8. TEST CYLINDERS WILL BE REQUIRED (4 MINIMUM), AND RECORDS OF RESULTS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ENGINEER OF RECORD (1 AT 7 DAYS, AND 2 AT 28 DAYS). SLUMP TESTS ARE RECOMMENDED.

9. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN CONCRETE INDICATED WITH A ROUGH, CLEAN SURFACE SHALL HAVE A 1/4" AVERAGE AMPLITUDE.

10. ALL COLD JOINTS SHALL BE ROUGHENED AND CLEANED PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE.11. ALL CONCRETE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM 28-DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE

FOLLOWING:• (A) TOTAL AIR CONTENT LIMITS INCLUDE BOTH ENTRAINED AND ENTRAPPED AIR +/- 1 1/2%. "N" IN

COLUMN INDICATES THE ADDITION OF ENTRAINED AIR IS NOT REQUIRED, BUT IS PERMITTED.

REINFORCING STEEL NOTES

1. NON-WELDED STEEL BAR REINFORCING SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615, GRADE 60. WELDED STEEL BAR REINFORCING SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A706.

2. WELDING OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A.W.S. QUALIFIED WELDERS IN CONFORMANCE WITH A.W.S. D1.1 USING E90 ELECTRODES FOR ASTM A615 REBAR, AND E80 ELECTRODES FOR ASTM A706 REBAR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS.

3. MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER FOR REINFORCING STEEL IN CAST-IN-PLACE (NON-PRESTRESSED) CONCRETE SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS:A. CONCRETE CAST AGAINST EARTH = 3"B. CONCRETE EXPOSED TO WEATHER:

• #6 BAR AND LARGER = 2"• #5 BAR AND SMALLER = 1 1/2"

C. CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER (SLABS, WALLS, & JOISTS):• #14 BARS AND LARGER = 1 1/2"• #11 BARS AND SMALLER = 3/4"

D. CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER (BEAMS & COLUMNS):• PRIMARY REINFORCEMENT, TIES, STIRRUPS, & SPIRALS = 1 1/2"

4. ALL DETAILING, FABRICATION, AND ERECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST EDITION OF ACI315, DETAILS AND DETAILING OF CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT.

5. LAP SPLICE LENGTHS FOR BARS INSTALLED IN CONCRETE AND CMU SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TABLE.

COMPRESSION LAP SPLICE LENGTH IN CONCRETE NOTES

1. VALUES IN TABLE ARE BASED ON 60 ksi OR 80 ksi REBAR. THERE SHALL BE NO ADJUSTMENT PERMITTED FOR REBAR EXCEEDING 80 ksi IN YIELD STRENGTH.

2. MULTIPLY LENGTHS IN TABLE BY 1.33 FOR f'c LESS THAN 3,000 psi.3. WHERE BARS OF DIFFERENT SIZES ARE SPLICED, PROVIDE THE LAP LENGTH OF THE LARGER BAR.4. VALUES IN THE TABLE CAN BE MULTIPLIED BY 0.75 WHERE LAP OCCURS WITHIN A SPIRAL IN A SPIRALLY

REINFORCED COLUMN, BUT SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 12".5. REBAR IN ALL CONCRETE MEMBERS SHALL BE SPLICED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "TENSION LAP SPLICE

LENGTH" TABLE UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS.

TENSION LAP SPLICE LENGTH IN CONCRETE NOTES

1. FOR HORIZONTAL BARS, VALUES IN THE TABLE SHALL BE MULTIPLIED BY 1.3 WHERE MORE THAN 12 INCHES OF FRESH CONCRETE IS CAST BELOW THE BAR.

2. VALUES IN THE TABLE SHALL BE MULTIPLIED BY 1.5 FOR EPOXY COATED BARS WITH CLEAR COVER LESS THAN 3 BAR DIAMETERS OR CLEAR SPACING LESS THAN 6 BAR DIAMETERS. MULTIPLY VALUES IN TABLE BY 1.2 FOR ALL OTHER EPOXY COATED BARS.

3. VALUES IN TABLE NEED NOT TO BE MULTIPLIED BY MORE THAN 1.7 DUE TO THE INCREASE FROM NOTES 1 AND 2.

4. VALUES IN THE TABLE SHALL BE MULTIPLIED BY 1.33 WHERE LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE IS USED.5. LAP SPLICES IN TENSION ARE NOT PERMITTED FOR BAR LARGER THAN #11. A FULL MECHANICAL OR FULL

WELDED SPLICE SHALL DEVELOPE AT LEAST 1.25fy OF THE BAR.6. WHERE CLEAR SPACING OF BARS BEING SPLICED IS AT LEAST 2 BAR DIAMETERS AND CLEAR COVER AT

LEAST 1 BAR DIAMETER, USE CASE 1. FOR ALL OTHER BAR ARRANGEMENTS, USE CASE 2.7. VALUES IN THE TABLE ARE BASED ON 60ksi REBAR. FOR OTHER REBAR YIELD STRENGTHS, MULTIPLY

VALUES IN THE TABLE BY THE SPECIFIED YIELD STRENGTH DIVIDED BY 60.8. WHERE BARS OF DIFFERENT SIZES ARE SPLICED, PROVIDED THE LAP LENGTH OF THE LARGER BAR.9. WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT (DEFORMED OR PLAIN WIRE) SHALL BE LAPPED ONE FULL MESH

SQUARE PLUS 2 INCHES MINIMUM, BUT NOT LESS THAN 8 INCHES.10. REBAR IN ALL CONCRETE MEMBERS SHALL BE SPLICED IN ACCORDANCE WITH "TENSION LAP SPLICE

LENGTH" TABLE, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS.

DEVELOPMENT LENGTH OF STANDARD HOOKS IN CONCRETE NOTES

1. VALUES IN TABLE ARE BASED ON 60ksi REBAR. FOR OTHER REBAR YIELD STRENGTHS, MULTIPLY VALUES IN THE TABLE BY THE SPECIFIED YIELD STRENGTH DIVIDED BY 60.

2. SEE ACI 318 SECTION 12.5 FOR ALLOWABLE REDUCTIONS IN DEVELOPMENT LENGTH. IT SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 8 BAR DIAMETERS OR 6 INCHES.

3. VALUES IN THE TABLE SHALL BE MULTIPLIED BY 1.2 FOR EPOXY COATED BARS.4. VALUES IN THE TABLE SHALL BE MULTIPLIED BY 1.33 WHERE LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE IS USED.5. HOOKED BARS ARE NOT CONSIDERED EFFECTIVE IN DEVELOPING BARS IN COMPRESSION.

LIGHT GAUGE COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING NOTES

1. STEEL FOR COLD-FORMED STEEL SECTIONS AND STEEL SHEET AND PLATE USED IN COLD-FORMED STEEL CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO SECTION A2.1 OF AISI STANDARD: "NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION FOR THE DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS", LATEST EDITION.

2. ALL 12, 14, AND 16 GAUGE MEMBERS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM A1003 GRADE ST50H (MINIMUM YIELD OF 50,000 psi). ALL 18 AND 20 GAUGE MEMBERS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM A1003 GRADE ST33H (MINIMUM YIELD OF 33,000 psi).

3. SCREWS FOR COLD-FORMED STEEL CONSTRUCTION SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM ULTIMATE TENSILE STRENGTH OF 58 ksi.

4. ALL WELDING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A.W.S. WELDERS QUALIFIED FOR WELDING COLD-FORMED STEEL CONFORMANCE WITH A.W.S. D1.3 USING E60 ELECTRODES, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. STEEL REQUIRING WELDING SHALL BE 16ga MINIMUM.

5. ALL LIGHT GAUGE METAL STUDS AND JOISTS SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS REGARDING MINIMUM INSTALLATION STANDARDS FOR BEARING, BRIDGING, AND BRACING.

6. BOTTOM TRACK TO MATCH STUD GAUGE WITH A MINIMUM 1 1/4" FLANGE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.7. ALL EXTERIOR WALLS TO HAVE HORIZONTAL BRIDGING @ 4'-0" MAXIMUM.8. REFER TO "DEFERRED SUBMITTALS" FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.

COMPOSITE METAL DECK

1. DEPTH OF DECK AND SLAB, TYPE OF DECK, STEEL GAUGES AND YIELD STRENGTHS, AND SLAB REINFORCING ARE SHOWN ON THE PLANS. DECK SHALL BE GALVANIZED, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

2. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, TEMPORARY SHORING OF COMPOSITE DECK IS NOT REQUIRED FOR ANTICIPATED CONSTRUCTION LOAD (WET CONCRETE WEIGHT PLUS 20psf CONSTRUCTION LOAD) FOR A 3-SPAN DECK CONDITION. OTHER SPAN CONDITIONS SHOULD BE COORDINATED WITH THE DECK SUPPLIER FOR ALLOWABLE UN-SHORED DISTANCES. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DEFLECTION LIMITATION. ALLOWABLE CONSTRUCTION LOADS SHALL BE SHOWN ON THE ERECTION DRAWINGS.

3. THE DECK ACTING COMPOSITELY WITH THE SLAB SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING BOTH THE FINAL DESIGN LIVE LOAD AND SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOAD SPECIFIED ON THESE DRAWINGS. METAL FLOOR DECK USED IN THE BUILDING SHALL HAVE MINIMUM SECTION PROPERTIES PER FOOT OF WIDTH AS FOLLOWS:• I (POSITIVE) 0.418 INCH^ (4)• I (NEGATIVE) 0.415 INCH^ (4)• S (POSITIVE) 0.355 INCH^ (3)• S (NEGATIVE) 0.360 INCH^ (3)

4. DECK SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE COLUMN DECK SUPPORT FRAMING AND DECK CLOSURE WHERE REQUIRED FOR CONCRETE POUR, INCLUDING PERIMETER OF INFILL SLAB.

5. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION OF FLOOR AND ROOF OPENINGS WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE FRAMING FOR OPENINGS PER TYPICAL DETAILS.

6. WELD STUDS THROUGH METAL DECK. DECK SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE COLUMN DECK SUPPORT FRAMING AND DECK CLOSURE WHERE REQUIRED FOR CONCRETE POUR.

POST INSTALLED ANCHOR NOTES

POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL ONLY BE USED WHERE SPECIFIED ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER OF RECORD PRIOR TO INSTALLING POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN PLACE OF MISSING OR MISPLACED CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHORS. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN IN PLACING POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH EXISTING REBAR. HOLES SHALL BE DRILLED AND CLEANED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS FOR PRODUCTS OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED ON THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD ALONG WITH CALCULATIONS THAT ARE PREPARED & SEALED BY A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER. THE CALCULATIONS SHALL DEMONSTRATE THAT THE SUBSTITUTED PRODUCT IS CAPABLE OF ACHIEVING, AT A MINIMUM, THE PERTINENT EQUIVALENT PERFORMANCE VALUES OF THE SPECIFIED PRODUCT USING THE BUILDING CODE.1. TYPICAL POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE AND CMU SHALL COMPLY WITH THE LATEST OF THEIR

RESPECTIVE ICC EVALUATION REPORTS.2. WHEN INSTALLING ANCHORS IN CONCRETE AND CMU, CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE EXISTING

REINFORCING STEEL, CONDUITS, ETC, PRIOR TO DRILLING FOR ANCHORS. CONTRACTOR SHALL USE CARE AND CAUTION TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO EXISTING REINFORCING BARS.

3. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 1" MINIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN EDGES OF ANY HOLES FOR POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS AND EXISTING REINFORCING STEEL.

4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE INSPECTION AND TESTING AS REQUIRED PER THE "SPECIAL INSPECTIONS" SECTION OF THESE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES.

REINFORCED MASONRY NOTES

1. MASONRY CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF TMS 602, "SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES". CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SHALL BE CLASSIFIED AS NORMAL WEIGHT DENSITY AND CONFORM TO ASTM C90. THE MASONRY ASSEMBLY SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH,[ (f'm) = 2,000 psi].

2. GROUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C476 MAY BE FINE OR COARSE, SELF-CONSOLIDATING OR CONVENTIONAL (AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION), AND SHALL BE PROPORTIONED TO ACHIEVE THE MINIMUM SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY. GROUT SHALL HAVE A DRY DENSITY OF [103/135] +/-3pcf. [NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATES IN GROUT SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM C404/LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATES IN GROUT SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM 330, LIGHT WIEGHT AGGREGATES FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE]. MORTAR SHALL COMPLY WITH PROPORTION SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM C270.

3. ALL MASONRY WALLS SHALL HAVE LADDER TYPE HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING CONSISTING OF GALVANIZED EXTRA HEAVY 220 LADDER MESH BY HOHMANN & BARNARD, INC OR EQUAL. LOCATE AT 16"oc UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON PLAN AND/OR SECTIONS. VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT IS PER FOUNDATION PLAN.

4. SUPPLY VERTICAL REINFORCING IN MINIMUM LENGTHS EQUAL TO 4'-0" PLUS LAP SPLICE LENGTH PER TABLE.

5. WALL CONSTRUCTION LIFTS FOR REINFORCING BARS AND INSULATION FILL SHALL BE PER ACI 530.6. TYPE "S" MORTAR IS REQUIRED FOR ALL WALLS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.7. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR LOCATION AND DETAIL OF CONTROL JOINTS AND EXPANSION JOINTS. 8. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND DETAILS OF DOOR AND WINDOW

OPENINGS FOR SPECIAL COURSING AND OTHER MASONRY DETAILS. THE INFORMATION SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS IS INTENDED TO DEFINE THE STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS ONLY.

9. ALL BOLTS, ANCHORS, ETC., INSERTED IN THE WALLS SHALL BE GROUTED SOLID INTO POSITION WITH MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE FROM ANCHOR TO EDGE OF GROUTED PORTION OF CMU IN ALL DIRECTIONS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS.

10. REINFORCING SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615, GRADE 60, UNLESS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. REINFORCING TO BE WELDED SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A706.

11. WHEN A FOUNDATION DOWEL DOES NOT LINE UP WITH A VERTICAL BLOCK CORE, IT SHALL NOT BE SLOPED MORE THAN (ONE HORIZONTAL IN 6 VERTICAL), OR 10 DEGREES. DOWEL MAY BE GROUTED INTO CELL IN VERTICAL ALIGNMENT, EVEN THOUGH IT IS IN AN ADJACENT CELL TO THE VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING, AS LONG AS THE CENTER-TO-CENTER SPACE BETWEEN THE WALL REINFORCING AND THE DOWEL DOES NOT EXCEED 8 INCHES. DOWELS SHALL NOT BE BENT INTO ALIGNMENT AFTER CONCRETE HAS BEEN CAST.

12. SPLICED REINFORCING SHALL BE LAPPED ACCORDING TO "MASONRY LAP SPLICE LENGTH" TABLE. SPLICED BARS SHALL BE WIRED TOGETHER. CONTRACTOR MAY OPT TO STAGGER SPLICES.

13. VERTICAL BARS SHALL BE HELD IN POSITION AT TOP AND BOTTOM AND AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 192 DIAMETERS OF THE REINFORCING OR 10'-0"

14. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE SECURELY IN PLACE AND INSPECTED BEFORE GROUTING STARTS.15. VERTICAL GROUTING MAY BE EITHER "LOW LIFT" OR "HIGH LIFT" AT THE CONTRACTOR'S OPTION.16. VERTICAL CELLS THAT WILL BE GROUTED SHALL HAVE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT TO MAINTAIN A

CONTINUOUS UNOBSTRUCTED CELL AREA NOT LESS THAN 2"x3".17. GROUTING OF MASONRY BEAMS OVER OPENINGS SHALL BE DONE IN ONE CONTINUOUS OPERATION.18. VERTICAL REINFORCING BARS SHALL MAINTAIN MINIMUM CLEARANCES AS FOLLOWS UNLESS NOTED

OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS:• INSIDE FACE OF MASONRY = 3/4"• ADJACENT BARS NOT SPLICED = 1" OR 1 BAR DIAMETER, WHICHEVER IS GREATER.

19. PRISM TESTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C1314 AND ASTM C140 SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH TEST REPORTS SENT TO ARCHITECT AND EOR FOR RECORD. REFER TO SPECIAL INSPECTIONS TABLE ITEM "EVALUATION OF STRENGTH" FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

MASONRY LAP SPLICE LENGTH NOTES

1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE DEVELOPMENT AND REBAR SPLICE LENGTHS SHOWN IN THE TABLES AS A MINIMUM UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE IN STRUCTURAL DETAILS OR NOTES.

2. "SINGLE" INDICATES ONE BAR PER CELL. "DOUBLE" INDICATES TWO BARS PER CELL. SEE PLAN.3. VALUES IN THE TABLE SHALL BE MULTIPLIED BY 1.5 FOR EPOXY COATED BARS.4. VALUES IN THE TABLE SHALL MULTIPLIED BY 1.33 WHEN USING LIGHT WEIGHT GROUT.

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S1.1GENERAL NOTES

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

STRUCTURAL ABBREVIATIONS

HSS HOLLOW STRUCTURALSECTION

INT INTERIORJ/BRG JOIST BEARINGJG JOIST GIRDERJG/BRG JOIST GIRDER BEARINGJST JOISTJT JOINTkip 1,000 POUNDSksi kips PER SQUARE INCHLB POUNDLLH LONG LEG HORIZONTALLLV LONG LEG VERTICALMAX MAXIMUMMECH MECHANICALMEZZ MEZZANINEMFR MANUFACTURERMIN MINIMUMMISC MISCELLANEOUSMTL METALNTS NOT TO SCALEoc ON CENTEROPNG OPENINGPAF POWER-ACTUATED

FASTENER

PARA PARAPETPEMB PRE-ENGINEERED METAL

BUILDING (MANUFACTURER)

PIL PILASTERPL PLATEPLYWD PLYWOODpsf POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOTPTDF(L) PRESSURE TREATED

DOUGLAS FIR (LARCH)

PTSYP PRESSURE TREATEDSOUTHERN YELLOW PINE

REINF REINFORCED, REINFORCINGREQD REQUIREDSCHED SCHEDULESHTG SHEATHINGSIM SIMILARSPF SPRUCE PINE FIRSTD STANDARDSTL STEELSTRUC STRUCTURALSYP SOUTHERN YELLOW PINET&B TOP AND BOTTOMT&G TONGUE AND GROOVET/BRG TRUSS BEARINGT/CONC TOP OF CONCRETET/FTG TOP OF FOOTINGT/PARA TOP OF PARAPETT/PIL TOP OF PILASTERT/S TOP OF SLABT/STL TOP OF STEELTYP TYPICALUNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISEUSGS US GEOLOGICAL SURVEYVAR VARIESVERT VERTICALw/ WITHWHS WELDED HEADED STUD(S)WP WORK POINTWWR WELDED WIRE

REINFORCEMENT

STRUCTURAL ABBREVIATIONS

# POUND(S), NUMBER& AND(E) EXISTING@ ATAB ANCHOR BOLTADDL ADDITIONALALT ALTERNATEAPPROX APPROXIMATE(LY)ARCH ARCHITECT(URAL)B/FTG BOTTOM OF FOOTINGBLDG BUILDINGBLKG BLOCKINGBM BEAMBMD BOTTOM OF METAL DECKBOT BOTTOMBP BASE PLATEBRG BEARINGBTWN BETWEENC-C CENTER TO CENTERCANT CANTILEVER(ED)CFS COLD-FORMED STEELCIP CAST-IN-PLACECJ CONTROL OR CONST JOINTCL CENTER LINECLR CLEARCMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNITCOL COLUMNCONC CONCRETECONN CONNECTIONCONST CONSTRUCTIONCONT CONTINUOUSCTR CENTERDBL DOUBLEDC DEMAND CRITICAL (WELD)deg DEGREEDF (L) DOUGLAS FIR (LARCH)dia DIAMETERDIM DIMENSIONDITTO do/DODWG DRAWINGDWL DOWELEA EACHEF EACH FACEEL ELEVATIONELEV ELEVATOREMB EMBEDMENTEQ EQUALETC ET CETERAEW EACH WAYEXP EXPANSIONEXT EXTERIORFDN FOUNDATIONFF FINISH FLOORFIN FINISHFLR FLOORFRMG FRAMINGFTG FOOTINGFV FIELD VERIFYga GAUGEGALV GALVANIZE(D)GLB GLUE-LAMINATED BEAMHGR HANGERHK HOOKHORIZ HORIZONTAL

CONCRETE TABLE

INTENDED USEMINIMUM 28 DAY

STRENGTH f'c

MAXWATER-CEMENT

RATIO

TOTAL AIR LIMITS(MAX % RATIO) (A)

INTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE 4 ksi 0.50 NFOOTINGS/FOUNDATIONWALLS 4 ksi 0.48

6 (WHERE EXPOSEDTO EXT.)

CONCRETE EXPOSED TODEICERS 4 ksi 0.40 6

SLABS ON METAL DECK 3.5 ksi 0.50 -ALL CONCRETE NOTOTHERWISE SPECIFIED 4 ksi 0.40 6

(INCHES) f'c = 3,000 psi OR GREATER TABLECOMPRESSION LAP SPLICE LENGTH IN CONCRETE

BAR SIZE fy = 60 ksi fy = 80 ksi#3 12 18#4 15 24#5 19 30#6 23 36#7 27 42#8 30 48#9 34 55

#10 39 61#11 43 68

TENSION LAP SPLICE LENGTH IN CONCRETE (INCHES) - 60 KSI REBAR TABLE

f'c = 3,000psi 3,000psi 3,500psi 3,500psi 4,000psi 4,000psi 5,000psi 5,000psiBAR SIZE CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 1 CASE 2

#3 22 33 20 30 19 28 17 25#4 29 43 27 40 25 37 23 34#5 36 54 33 50 31 47 28 42#6 43 65 40 60 37 56 34 50#7 63 94 58 87 54 81 49 73#8 72 107 66 99 62 93 56 83#9 81 121 75 112 70 105 63 94#10 91 136 84 126 79 118 71 106#11 101 151 93 140 87 131 78 117

IN CONCRETE (INCHES) - 60 ksi REBAR TABLEDEVELOPMENT LENGTH OF STANDARD HOOKS

BAR SIZE f'c = 3,000 psi f'c = 3,500 psi f'c = 4,000 psi f'c = 5,000 psi#3 9 8 8 7#4 11 11 10 9#5 14 13 12 11#6 17 16 15 13#7 20 18 17 15#8 22 21 19 17#9 25 23 22 20#10 28 26 25 22#11 31 29 27 24

f'm = 2,000 psi - MASONRY LAP SPLICE LENGTH (IN) TABLE

CMU SIZE 8" 10" 10" 12" 12"

BAR SIZESTD HOOK

DEVELOPMENTLENGTH (IN)

SINGLE DOUBLE SINGLE DOUBLE

#3 5 12 12 12 12 12#4 6 13 12 20 12 20#5 8 20 16 32 13 32#6 9 38 29 61 24 61#7 10 52 40 84 33 84#8 12 79 61 96 50 96

PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSS NOTES

1. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:A. DESCRIPTION OF DESIGN CRITERIA.B. ENGINEERING ANALYSIS DEPICTING MEMBER STRESSES AND OVERALL TRUSS DEFLECTION.C. TRUSS MEMBER SIZES, THICKNESS, AND CONNECTIONS AT TRUSS JOINTS.D. TRUSS SUPPORT REACTIONS.E. TOP CHORD, BOTTOM CHORD, AND WEB BRACING REQUIREMENTS.F. BLOCKING TRUSSES AS REQUIRED.

2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:A. CALCULATE STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS OF COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSS MEMBERS

ACCORDING TO AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE "NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS", LATEST EDITION.

B. DESIGN, FABRICATE, AND ERECT COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSSES TO WITHSTAND SPECIFIED DESIGN LOADS WITHIN LIMITS AND UNDER CONDITIONS REQUIRED PER TABLE.

3. NO FIELD MODIFICATIONS OF TRUSSES ARE PERMITTED UNLESS FABRICATOR PROVIDES CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS DETAILING THE MODIFICATION. CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE STATE WHERE THE PROJECT IS LOCATED.

4. REFER TO "DEFERRED SUBMITTALS" FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.

STEEL FLOOR & ROOF DECK NOTES

1. DECK SHALL SPAN A MINIMUM 3 SUPPORT SPACES. LOCATE JOINTS OVER SUPPORTING MEMBERS ONLY, AND LAP 2" MINIMUM.

2. METAL DECK SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL THE JOISTS HAVE BEEN ALIGNED, AND ALL BRACING AND BRIDGING IS INSTALLED.

3. METAL DECK TO BE FINISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CURRENT PROVISIONS, RECOMMENDED PRACTICES, AND STANDARDS OF THE STEEL DECK INSTITUTE.

4. FURNISH AND INSTALL SHEET METAL CLOSURES, JOINT COVERS, CONCRETE STOPS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION.

5. DO NOT SUSPEND PIPES OR DUCTS DIRECTLY FROM DECK.6. METAL DECK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE STEEL DECK INSTITUTE. SEE PLAN FOR

TYPES AND GAUGES.7. DECKING MANUFACTURER SHALL COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATIONS OF OPENINGS WITH

ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.8. ROOF DECK SHALL BE GALVANIZED WITH G60 COATING MINIMUM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.9. METAL ROOF DECK HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO FUNCTION AS A DIAPHRAGM FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF

LATERAL LOADS. ATTACH DECK UNITS TO EACH OTHER PER PLAN NOTES. CONNECT DECK UNITS TO EXTERIOR SUPPORTS AND ALL OTHER DECK BOUNDARIES PER PLAN NOTES. ALL METAL DECK SHALL BE FASTENED TO JOIST SUPPORTS AND AT SIDE LAPS PER PLAN NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS.

STEEL JOIST NOTES

1. ALL STEEL JOISTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LATEST STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. JOIST FABRICATOR SHALL BE A MEMBER OF THE SJI.

2. BRIDGING FOR STEEL JOISTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LATEST STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.

3. PROVIDE BOTTOM CHORD CEILING EXTENSIONS AS SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS OR AS NOTED OTHERWISE.

4. HEADER ANGLES FOR STEEL JOISTS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND FURNISHED BY THE JOIST FABRICATOR AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS.

5. ALL STEEL BAR JOISTS SHALL BE SPACED AND SIZED AS SHOWN ON PLANS.6. TOP AND BOTTOM CHORDS OF ALL JOISTS SHALL BE IN STRAIGHT ALIGNMENT BEFORE WELDING OR

FINAL-BOLTING ANY BRIDGING IN PLACE.7. THE ENDS OF ALL BRIDGING TERMINATING AT CONCRETE OR MASONRY WALLS SHALL BE ANCHORED

THERETO AT TOP AND BOTTOM CHORDS PER TYPICAL DETAILS.8. ALL BAR JOISTS AT COLUMN CENTERLINES (OR ADJACENT TO COLUMN CENTERLINES) TO HAVE BOTTOM

CHORD EXTENDED TO COLUMN OR BEAM. DO NOT WELD UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED AS SUCH.9. ALL STEEL JOISTS SHALL BE SHOP PAINTED WITH MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD SHOP PRIMER

COMPLYING TO SSPC-PAINT 15.10. REFER TO "DEFERRED SUBMITTALS" FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.

EQ

2" CLR

SLAB INTERIOR CORNER

#4 x 5'-0" @ MID-DEPTH OF SLAB (WHERE 2'-6" CANNOT BE OBTAINED, EXTEND AS FAR AS POSSIBLE AND HOOK)

EQ

11

TOP OF FTGBOTTOM OF FTG

ENGINEEREDBACKFILL

PIPE, CONDUIT DUCT BANK. ETC.

BELOW BOTTOM OF FOOTING

PIPE DIAMETER +12" (MIN. 24" WIDE)

TOP OF FTG BOTTOM BAR

CONCRETE OUTLINE

CLOSE TO BOTTOM OF FOOTING

PIPE SLEEVEPIPE

NOTE:SLEEVE I.D. 2" LARGER THAN O.D., TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CAULK OR PROVIDE FLOWABLE GROUT w/ COMPRESSIBLE WRAP AROUND PIPE.

TOP OF FTG

PIPE SLEEVE

BOTTOM BARBOTTOM OF FOOTING

CLEAR OF TOP & BOTTOM BAR IN FOOTING ORFOUNDATION WALL (OR TRENCH FOOTING/GRADE BM.)

TOP BAR (AS APPLICABLE)

2' - 0"

6"

(MIN

)

1' -

0"

6"

6" (MIN

)2"

CLR

(MIN

)2"

CLR

BOTTOM OF FTG

PLATE WASHER SCHEDULE

ANCHOR ROD DIA. PLATE WASHER SIZE

7/8" 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" x 5/8"

1" 3" x 3" x 5/8"

1 1/4" 3 1/2" x 3 1/2" x 5/8"

1 1/2" 4" x 4" x 5/8"ANCHOR ROD SIZE AND EMBED PER COL SCHED

PLATE PER PLATE WASHER SCHEDULE

WASHER

COL PER PLAN OR SCHED

TACK WELD

1" NON-METALIC NON-SHRINK GROUT

BASE PLATE PER COL SCHED

DE

PTH

EM

BE

D3

1/2"

MIN

.

3/4" & SMALLER 2" x 2" x 1/2"

NOTE: ANCHOR RODS TO BE ASTM F1554, GRADE 36, FULLY-THREADED RODS w/ PLATE WSHR & NUT

ON BOTTOM, TYP.

PR

OJE

CTI

ON

&

TH

RE

AD

S

SCHEDULE

PER COLUMN

SC

HE

DU

LE

PE

R C

OLU

MN

BOLTS - TYP2" FOR 1"

BOLTS - TYP1 1/2" FOR 3/4"

EQ EQ

EQ

EQ

COLUMN TYPE & SIZE PER COLUMN

SCHEDULE

1/4"

BOND BREAKER

SEE TYPICAL SLAB BOX-OUT DETAIL

BEVELED KEYWAY

COLUMN TYPE & SIZE PER PLAN & SCHEDULE

BASE PLATE & ANCHOR BOLTS PER PLAN

CONCRETE SLAB & REINFORCEMENT PER PLAN

COMPACTEDGRANULAR FILL

VAPOR BARRIER

NON-SHRINK GROUT

FOOTING SIZE & REINF. PER PLAN & SCHEDULE

PER PLANT/FTG

t

PE

R P

LAN

t

CONTROL JOINT

CONSTRUCTION JOINT

CONTROL JOINTCONSTRUCTION

JOINTCOLUMN & BASE PLATE PER PLAN & SCHEDULE

2'-0"x2'-0" BOXOUT TYP CONST JT @ EACH COL FILL MIN 2 DAYS AFTER SLAB IS POURED

(TYP)

3" M

IN

ONE ANGLE

5"

STEEL LINTEL SCHEDULE KEY

FOR LINTELS NOT SHOWN IN THE DOOR OR WINDOW SCHEDULE OR ON THE ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, USE THE ANGLE SIZE SHOWN IN THE TABLE BELOW.

OPENING SIZEANGLE SIZE

BRICK VENEER

N/AUP TO 1'-0"

1'-1" TO 4'-8"

4'-9" TO 6'-0"

6'-1" TO 7'-4"

7'-5" TO 12'-0"

L 6"x3 1/2"x5/16" LLH

L 6"x4"x7/16" LLH

L 8"x6"x7/16" LLV

NOTES1. ALL ANGLES MUST HAVE 8" OF BEARING AT EACH END.2. THIS SCHEDULE DOES NOT INCLUDE EFFECT OF FLOOR OR ROOF FRAMING LOADS.3. ALL ANGLES TO BE GALVANIZED.4. WELD ANGLES TOGETHER, BACK-TO-BACK, w/ 3/16" WELDS , 2" EVERY 12", TOP & BOTTOM.

L 6"x3 1/2"x3/8" LLH

STRUCTURAL STEEL NOTES

1. FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS IS TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH "AISC CODE OF STANDARD PREACTICE", LATEST EDITION.

2. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE STEEL FABRICATOR TO DESIGN THE CONNECTIONS. CONNECTIONS ARE TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT AISC STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE GOVERNMENT CODES. ALL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE BOLTED OR WELDED AND SHALL DEVELOPE 60% OF THE ALLOWABLE UNIFORM LOAD TABULATED IN THE AISC "MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION" FOR ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN, 10k (ASD), OR SHEAR REACTION SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. PROVIDE MINIMUM NUMBER OF ASTM F3125 GRADE A325 OR A490 BOLTS AS SHOWN IN THE "STRUCTURAL STEEL BOLTED CONNECTIONS" TABLE.

3. ANCHOR RODS TO BE ASTM F1554, GRADE 36 FULLY THREADED RODS WITH PLATE WASHERS AND NUTS ON THE BOTTOM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE-SEE "TYPICAL ANCHOR BOLT" DETAIL.

4. BOLT HOLES SHALL BE 1/16" OVERSIZE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. FIELD BURNING OF BOLT HOLES SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED.

5. WELDING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A.W.S. QUALIFIED WELDERS IN CONFORMANCE WITH A.W.S. D1.1 USING E70 SERIES ELECTRODES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS.

6. ALL STEEL SHALL BE SHOP PAINTED WITH A STANDARD ALKYD PRIMER (GRAY). FOR HARSH ENVIROMENTS USE A GRAY ZINC ORGANIC OR INORGANIC PRIMER.

7. FABRICATE ALL BEAMS WITH THE MILL CAMBER UP.8. CONNECTION NOTATION IS AS FOLLOWS. SEE PLAN NOTES TO DETERMINE IF LOADS SHOWN ON

PLAN/DETAILS ARE ALLOWABLE (ASD) OR ULTIMATE (LRFD):• AXIAL FORCE = P• SHEAR = V OR [ ]• MOMENT = M• TORSION = T

9. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING ASTM DESIGNATIONS AND GRADES:• WIDE FLANGE = A992, fy = 50ksi• ANGLES, CHANNELS, PLATES, BARS, AND RODS = A36, fy = 36ksi• RECTANGULAR = A500 GRADE B, fy = 46ksi• ROUND HSS = A500 GRADE B, fy = 42ksi• STRUCTURAL PIPE = A53 GRADE B, fy = 35ksi

10. REFER TO "DEFERRED SUBMITTALS" FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.

BM-SEE PLAN

COL-SEE PLAN

NOTE:ADD STUDS AS REQ'D SO THAT MAXIMUM SPACING BETWEEN STUDS DOES NOT EXCEED 3'-0" (THIS REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO ALL COMPOSITE BEAMS)

1 STUD MAX PER FLUTE OF DECK (NOTE 6)

FIREPROOF PER ARCH

BREAK DECK AT GIRDERS AS REQ'D TO CENTER STUDS. USE GAGE

FILLER BY DECK SUPPLIER

PERPENDICULAR PARALLEL

NOTES:

1. W16 x 36 [38] [XX] INDICATES NUMBER OF END WELDED STUDS EQUALLY SPACED ON TOP FLANGE OF BEAM. COMPOSITE BEAM IS DESIGNED UNSHORED.

2. ATTACHMENT OF STEEL DECK AT EACH SUPPORT & SIDELAPS PER PLAN NOTES. STUD WELDING THROUGH DECKING CAN BE CONSIDERED AS ONE ATTACHMENT. DO NOT PRIME TOP FLANGE OF STEEL BEAMS.

3. DECK SUPPORT AT STEEL COLUMN: USE 3 1/2" x 3 1/2" x 16 ga ANGLE WELDED AT PERIMETER OF STEEL COLUMN

4. CONTINUITY OF DECK: MINIMUM 2 SPAN CONTINUOUS - UNSHORED.

5. BEARING OF DECK: MINIMUM 3" AT ENDS BEARING ON CONCRETE AND 2" ON STEEL.

6. SPACING OF STUDS: MINIMUM SPACING FOR STUDS IS 12"oc; MAXIMUM SPACING IS 36"oc DO NOT PLACE STUDS ON CANTILEVER SPAN OF BEAM.

7. DEFLECTION OF DECK SLAB: FLOOR FRAMING WILL DEFLECT UNDER WEIGHT OF WET CONCRETE. PROVIDE ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR LEVELING AS NEEDED AFTER CONCRETE HAS CURED.

8. COMPOSITE STUD SIZES: ALL COMPOSITE STUDS ARE 3/4" dia. USE 3" STUDS FOR 1 1/2" DECK, 3 1/2" STUDS FOR 2" DECK, AND 5 1/2" STUDS FOR 3" DECK.

SEE NOTE #3 SEE NOTE #3

1/2 STUD SPACE

1/2 STUD SPA 1/2 STUD SPA

HALF THE NUMBER OF STUDS SHOWN ON PLAN [ ] HALF THE NUMBER OF STUDS SHOWN ON PLAN [ ]

1/2 STUD SPA

STUD SPACINGSTUD SPACING

COMPOSITE STEEL BEAM NOTES

1. SHEAR CONNECTORS SHALL BE HEADED STUDS MEETING ASTM A108, Fu=65ksi.2. SHEAR CONNECTOR TYPE, LENGTH, SHEAR VALUE, AND DETAILED LAYOUT SHALL BE SUBMITTED WITH

THE COMPOSITE METAL DECK SHOP DRAWINGS PER COMPOSITE METAL DECK NOTES.3. MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF SHEAR CONNECTORS SHALL NOT EXCEED THE SLAB DEPTH MINUS 1/2".4. SPACING OF SHEAR CONNECTORS WITHIN ANY GIVEN LENGTH SHALL BE AS UNIFORM AS POSSIBLE.5. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE NON-COMPOSITE AND COMPOSITE BEAMS DO NOT REQUIRE TEMPORARY

SHORING.6. NO PAINT SHALL BE APPLIED ON SHEAR CONNECTORS OR ON THE TOP SURFACE OF THE BEAMS THAT

RECIEVE FIELD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS.

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S1.2GENERAL NOTES, SCHEDULES, AND

TYPICAL DETAILS

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSSES - DESIGN CRITERIA TABLE

TOP CHORD: 20 psf LIVE LOAD10 psf DEAD LOADSNOW LOAD/ WIND LOAD PER ROOF PLAN AND NOTES

BOTTOM CHORD: 0 psf LIVE LOAD5 psf DEAD LOAD

WIND UPLIFT: PER "DESIGN LOADS" ON THESE GENERAL NOTES &ROOF PLAN

TRUSS SPACING: PER PLANCAMBER: 75 PERCENT OF DEAD LOAD (USE 5 PSF ONLY)DEFLECTION LIMITS: AS SHOWN BELOWROOF TRUSSES: TOTAL LOAD =L/240

LIVE LOAD = L/360

LOCAL DEFLECTION LIMITSBETWEEN PANEL POINTS

AS SHOWN BELOW

TOP CHORD TOTAL LOAD: L/180TOP CHORD LIVE LOAD: L/240BOTTOM CHORD TOTALLOAD:

L/240

BOTTOM CHORD LIVE LOAD: L/360

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS - CONCRETE TABLE

ITEMINSPECTIONFREQUENCY SCOPE

REINFORCEMENT PERIODIC

INSPECT REINFORCEMENT (INCLUDINGPRESTRESSING TENDONS) AND PLACEMENT;

VERIFY CONFORMANCE WITH CONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS, AND THAT BARS ARE FREEFROM MATERIALS THAT COULD PREVENT

BOND, ARE ADEQUATELY LAPPED, SPLICED,TIED, AND SUPPORTED

REINFORCEMENT PERIODICVERIFY WELDABILITY OF REBAR OTHER THAN

ASTM A 706; INSPECT SINGLE PASS FILLETWELDS NOT GREATER THAN 5/16"

REINFORCEMENT CONTINUOUSINSPECT ALL OTHER WELDS (SEE ALSO"STEEL" SPECIAL INSPECTIONS TABLE)

ANCHORINSTALLATION PERIODIC

INSPECT CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHORS ANDBOLTS

ANCHORINSTALLATION PERIODIC

INSPECT POST-INSTALLED MECHANICAL ANDADHESIVE ANCHORS NOT OTHERWISE

SPECIFIED

ANCHORINSTALLATION CONTINUOUS

INSPECT POST-INSTALLED MECHANICAL ANDADHESIVE ANCHORS PER THE

REQUIREMENTS IN THEIR RESPECTIVE ICC-ESREPORTS

MIX DESIGN PERIODIC VERIFY USE OF APPROVED MIX DESIGN

SAMPLING ANDTESTING CONTINUOUS

PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT,FABRICATE SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH

TESTING; PERFORM SLUMP AND AIR CONTENTTESTS, AND DETERMINE TEMPERATURE OF

THE CONCRETE

CONCRETEPLACEMENT PERIODIC

VERIFY MAINTENANCE OF CURINGTEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES

CONCRETEPLACEMENT PERIODIC

INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION,AND DIMENSIONS OF CONCRETE MEMBER

BEING FORMED

CONCRETEPLACEMENT CONTINUOUS CONCRETE PLACEMENT

ELEMENTS AND ASSEMBLIES, AND STEEL FABRICATING)(INCLUDING PRE-MANUFACTURED WOOD STRUCTURAL

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS - OFF-SITE FABRICATION


FABRICATION ANDIMPLEMENTATION

PROCEDURESPERIODIC

VERIFY THAT FABRICATOR MAINTAINSDETAILED FABRICATION AND QUALITY

CONTROL PROCEDURES THAT PROVIDE ABASIS FOR INSPECTION CONTROL OF THEWORKMANSHIP AND THE FABRICATOR'S

ABILITY TO CONFORM TO APPROVEDCONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND

REFERENCED STANDARDS; REVIEWPROCEDURES FOR COMPLETENESS AND

ADEQUACY RELATIVE TO THE CODEREQUIREMENTS FOR THE FABRICATOR'S

SCOPE OF WORK

NOTE -

SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR OFF-SITEFABRICATION IS NOT REQUIRED FOR

FABRICATORS APPROVED BY THE BUILDINGOFFICIAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CODE

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS - SOILS AND FOUNDATIONS TABLE


SOILS PERIODIC

VERIFY MATERIALS BELOW SHALLOWFOUNDATIONS ARE ADEQUATE TO ACHIEVE

THE DESIGN BEARING CAPACITY; VERIFYEXCAVATIONS ARE EXTENDED TO PROPER

DEPTH AND HAVE REACHED PROPERMATERIAL; PERFORM CLASSIFICATION ANDTESTING OF COMPACTED FILL MATERIALS;

PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF COMPACTED FILL,INSPECT SUBGRADE AND VERIFY THAT SITE

HAS BEEN PREPARED PROPERLY

SOILS CONTINUOUS

VERIFY USE OF PROPER MATERIALS,DENSITIES, LIFT THICKNESSES, AND

COMPACTION OF FILL; VERIFY MATERIALSAND PROCEDURES COMPLY WITH THE

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS - STEEL TABLE


MATERIALVERIFICATION PERIODIC

HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS, NUTS, ANDWASHERS: REVIEW MANUFACTURER'S

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE;IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORMTO ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THE

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS


STRUCTURAL STEEL: REVIEWMANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED MILL TEST

REPORTS; IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS ONSTEEL SHAPES TO CONFORM TO AISC

STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THECONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS


WELD FILLER MATERIALS: REVIEWMANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE; IDENTIFICATION MARKINGSTO CONFORM WITH AWS SPECIFICATIONS

IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS


COLD-FORMED STEEL DECK: REVIEWMANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED TEST

REPORTS; IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TOCONFORM TO ASTM STANDARDS

SPECIFIED IN THE CONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS

HIGH-STRENGTHBOLTING PERIODIC

BEARING-TYPE CONNECTIONS: VERIFYBOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, PAINT,

INSTALLATION, AND TIGHTENING CONFORMTO THEIR RESPECTIVE STANDARDS

WELDING PERIODICSINGLE PASS FILLET WELDS NOT GREATER

THAN 5/16"

WELDING PERIODIC

VERIFY WELDABILITY OF REINFORCINGSTEEL OTHER THAN ASTM A 706; ALLREINFORCING STEEL NOT REQUIRING

CONTINUOUS INSPECTION

WELDING CONTINUOUS

COMPLETE AND PARTIAL JOINTPENETRATION GROOVE WELDS;

MULTIPASS FILLET WELDS; SINGLE PASSFILLET WELDS > 5/16"

STRUCTURALDETAILS PERIODIC

INSPECT STEEL FRAME FOR COMPLIANCEWITH CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR

MEMBER SIZES AND LOCATIONS, BRACING,AND CONNECTIONS

METAL DECK PERIODICINSPECT PUDDLE WELDING, SCREW

ATTACHMENTS, AND SIDELAP FASTENINGOF ROOF AND FLOOR DECK

OPEN WEB STEELJOISTS PERIODIC

INSPECT JOIST AND JOIST GIRDERS FORWELDED OR BOLTED END CONNECTIONS;HORIZONTAL AND DIAGONAL BRIDGING;

BRIDGING THAT DIFFERS FROM SJISPECIFICATIONS

N.T.S.S1.2

F REINF @ INTERIOR CORNERSN.T.S.S1.2

E TYPICAL FOUNDATION PIPE PENETRATION DETAILS

N.T.S.S1.2

G TYP ANCHOR ROD DETAIL

N.T.S.S1.2

B TYP BASE PLATE DETAIL

N.T.S.S1.2

A TYP INTERIOR COLUMN

N.T.S.S1.2

D TYP SLAB BOX-OUT @ COL

STRUCTURAL STEEL BOLTED CONNECTIONS TABLE

NOMINAL MEMBER DEPTH MINIMUM NUMBER OF BOLTS8" - 10" 2

12" - 14" 316" - 18" 421" - 24" 5

27" OR DEEPER 6

N.T.S.S1.2

C TYPICAL COMPOSITE SLAB CONSTRUCTION DETAIL

WEB

RETURN UP

FLANGE

FLANGEMILS TO GAUGE CONVERSION CHART

MILS GAUGE33 MILS 20 GA.43 MILS 18 GA.

54 MILS 16 GA.68 MILS 14 GA.97 MILS 12 GA.

600S162-54

MEMBER DEPTH IN INCHES

(I.E. - 600 = 6")(I.E. - 362 = 3 5/8")(I.E. - 250 = 2 1/2")

MEMBER TYPES = STUDT = TRACK

FLANGE WIDTH OF MEMBER IN INCHES(I.E. - 162 = 1 5/8")(I.E. - 200 = 2 ")

MAT'L THICKNESS IN MILS

STUD SECTION

TRACK SECTION

PUNCHOUT

WEB

NUMBER OF FULL HT STUDSPER MTL STUD DESIGNERINFILL WITH STUDS @ 16"oc

CONT EDGE ANGLE

BRG STUDS FROM LINTEL ABOVE WHERE REQD

ATTACH JAMB STUDS TO CONT EDGE ANGLE w/(2) VERT SLIDE CLIPS, TYP

CFS BOX HDR PER MTL STUD DESIGNER

BRG STUDS

OPENING WIDTH

SEE ARCH DWGS

TYPICAL HEADER DETAIL

TYPICAL JAMB @ FOUNDATION DETAIL

TYPICAL SILL DETAIL

FASTEN ADJACENT STUDS w/STITCH WELDS @ 12"oc VERTICALLY BOTH ENDS

INFILL STUDS @ 16"oc BELOW SILL

CONT BOT TRACK

6" x 16ga MTL STUD @ SILL WELDED TO LOWER TRACK

CONT TOP TRACK - SCREW TO STUD w/ #10 TEK SCREWS @ 16"oc

SEAT STUDS FULLY DOWN INTO BOTTOM TRACK

STEEL LOOSE LINTEL AS REQD PER PLAN &

SCHED (DO NOT ATTACH TO HDR)

B

B

DETAIL B-B

DETAIL A-A

A

A

2 ROWS #10 TEK SCREWS TRACK TO TUBE

PIECE OF 12 ga TRACK FOR BRG - WELD TO

BRG STUDSANGLE NOT SHOWN ON TUBE

FOR CLARITY. L 1/8" SHORT OF OPNG EA END

2x2x12 GAGE ANGLE, SILL CONN. TO STUD. WELD 3 SIDES OF BOTH LEGS

POWER ACTUATED FASTENERS @ 16"oc

(2) POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS WITHIN 3" OF FACE OF STUD GROUP, BOTH SIDES

PROVIDE 3" OF WELD, STUD TO STUD ADJACENT TO SILL CONNECTION

ATTACH CONT TRACK TO STUDS w/ #10 TEK SCREW EA SIDE

PROVIDE 3" OF WELD, STUD TO STUD ADJACENT TO ANGLE CONNECTION

PROVIDE 3" OF WELD, TRACK TO TUBE @ END, BOTH SIDES

2x2x12 GAGE ANGLE, TRACK TO FULL HEIGHT STUD. WELD 3 SIDES OF BOTH LEGS

1/8

1/8 JAMB STUDSTO BOT TRACK

1/8

STUD TOTRACK1/8

STUDS TOTRACK

1/8 3

FRONT &BACK

1/8 2-12

VENEER PER ARCH

NOTE: METAL STUD DESIGNER TO VERIFY ALL CONNECTIONS SHOWN HERE & MODIFY AS REQ'D.

SIMPSON RCKW KNEEWALL CONNECTOR AS REQ'D-SIZE &

SPACING PER MTL STUD DESIGNER

HDR TO RESIST C & C WIND LOADS (OUT OF PLANE)

PER CONNECTION SCHEDULE

TYP= INDICATES BEAM/COLUMN MOMENT CONNECTION ON PLAN

COL PER PLANBM PER PLAN - TYP

USE PRE-QUALIFIED MOMENT CONNECTIONS AS ALLOWED/REQUIRED BY CODE FOR APPLICABLE MOMENT FRAME SYSTEM

LOADA

B

A - A

BEAM OR JOIST (TYP)

LOAD

L-4x4x1/4" UNDER RTU CURB (OMIT WHEN CURB

IS WITHIN 2" OF JST)

L-3x3x1/4" AS REQUIRED TO FRAME OPENINGS

L-4x4x1/4" UNDER RTU CURB TYP - PROVIDE JOIST STRUT AS REQD - PER TYP

JOIST STRUT DETAIL

OUTLINE OF RTU CURB

BM OR JOIST

L4x4x1/4"x6" LONG

NEW L-2x2x1/4" FROM FRAME TO BOTTOM CHORD JST PANEL POINT - PER TYP

JOIST STRUT DETAIL

STEEL JST

FIELD INSTALL L-2x2x1/4" EA SIDE OF JST AS SHOWN

3/16

"A"

"A"1/*' 1

3/16

1" MAX3/16

A

B

2" MAX

B - B

NOTE:DETAIL APPLIES TO ALL CONCENTRATED LOADS WHICH EXCEED 100# (OR MULTIPLE LOADS WHOSE SUM BTW PANEL POINTS EXCEEDS 100#) AND ARE LOCATED MORE THAN 3" ("A") OFF PANEL POINTS (TOP OR BOTTOM CHORDS)

TYP JOIST STRUT DETAIL

JST PER PLANRTU SUPPORT ANGLE @ OPENING PER RTU SUPPORTS

& OPENINGS DETAIL

DECK OPENING1/2" dia (MIN) THRU BOLT @ EA JOIST

C6x8.2 CONT ACROSS (3) BAYS - MIN

MTL DECKING PER PLAN

CURB PER MECH

COLUMN PER PLAN

2x2x1/4" SUPPORT ANGLES

FRAMING MEMBERS PER PLAN (TYP)

GALVANIZED METAL DECK PER PLAN

NOTE:DECK AT PERIMETER OF BUILDING TO BE ATTACHED PER PLAN NOTES

SIDELAP ATTACHMENT PER PLAN NOTES

DECK EDGE SUPPORT PER PLAN

ATTACH AT ALL SUPPORTS PER PLAN NOTES

CENTERLINE

OF SUPPORT

PER PLAN NOTESJOIST PER PLAN

JOIST PER PLAN

BM PER PLAN

MTL ROOF DECKING PER PLAN

SIDELAP ATTACHMENT PER PLAN NOTES

DECK EDGE SUPPORT PER PLAN

CENTERLINE

OF SUPPORT

GALVANIZED METAL DECK PER PLAN

NOTE:DECK AT PERIMETER OF BUILDING TO BE ATTACHED PER PLAN NOTES

ATTACH AT ALL SUPPORTS PER PLAN NOTES

PER PLAN NOTES

JOIST PER PLAN

JOIST PER PLAN

BM PER PLAN

MTL ROOF DECKING PER PLAN

PER PLAN

CONT L-3 1/2x3 1/2x1/4"

4" x 4" PL COORD THICKNESS w/JOIST MFR

NOTE:WHERE JOIST DOES NOT FALL ON COLUMN CENTERLINE, USE THIS DETAIL (SIM.) FOR JOIST CLOSEST TO COLUMN.

DO NOT WELD BOTTOM CHORD

1/2" COLUMN CAP PLATE

(2) 1/2"dia THREADED STUDS WELDED TO COLUMN CAP PLATE - PROVIDE SLOTTED HOLES THRU JOIST BEARING FLANGE - COORD w/JOIST MFR REQUIREMENTS, TYP

COLUMN PER PLAN

AFTERSTEEL ISALIGNED

CAP PLATE5/8"

1/4

BOLTS: 3/4"dia A325-N CONNECTION ANGLES (PAIRS): t MIN = 3/8"

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N S

CH

ED

"N" R

OW

S @

3" -

PE

R

3"

BOLTS: 3/4"dia A325-N CONNECTION ANGLES (PAIRS): t MIN = 3/8"

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N S

CH

ED

"N" R

OW

S @

3" -

PE

R

3"

COL PER SCHED

COL PER SCHED

BM PER PLAN

BM PER PLAN

BRG

10"

BRG

10"CURVED LINTEL (USE SIZE PER STEEL LINTEL SCHED) @ CURVED WINDOWS-COORD LOCATIONS w/ ARCH DWGS-TYP

INDICATES CENTER OF OPENING

EQ EQ

R=P

ER

AR

CH

PER STEEL LINTEL SCHEDULE

MAX LENGTH (OPENING SIZE)

CONT BEVELED2" BY t/2 KEYWAY

SLAB REINF CONTINUITY SHALL BE MAINTAINED

VAPOR BARRIERCOMPACTED GRANULAR FILL

SAWCUT 1/8"x t/4 DEEP

NOTES:1. SAW-CUT CONTROL JOINTS TO BE CUT AS SOON AS SURFACE WILL NOT BE TORN, ABRADED, OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED BY CUTTING ACTION. (WITHIN 8 TO 10 HR. OF BURNISHING)2. SPACE CONTROL JOINTS AT 15'-0" MAX. FOR INTERIOR SLABS UNO ON PLANS.

VAPOR BARRIERCOMPACTED GRANULAR FILL

CONTROL JOINTCONSTRUCTION JOINT

2" C

LR

SLAB REINF CONTINUITY SHALL BE MAINTAINED

3. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS TO BE USED AT END OF EACH POUR.

PE

R P

LAN

PE

R P

LAN CONC SLAB & REINF

PER PLAN

(2) #5 CONT

STRINGER, BY OTHERS

L-4x4x3/8" x 8" LONGw/ (2) 5/8"dia x 5" HILTI KWIK BOLT-TZ INTO CONC

8"P

ER

PLA

N

24 24

#4@18"oc

1

12' - 0"

ATTACHMENT TO STRINGER BY OTHERS

2'-0" MIN

48 dia

0" T

YP

0" TYP

2'-0" MIN

48 dia

2'-0

" MIN

48 d

ia

2'-0

" MIN

48 d

ia

2'-0" MIN

48 dia

#5 MIN VERT - TYP

PLAN OF ALT CORNER PLAN OF INTERSECTION PLAN OF TYPICAL CORNER

NOTES:1. WHERE SINGLE CURTAIN OF REINFORCING OCCURS, BEND BARS AS SHOWN FOR OUTSIDE BARS.2. FOR MORE THAN 2 BARS PER LAYER, EXTEND INNER BARS 12" INTO PERPENDICULAR FOOTING.

OUTER BARS SHALL BE PLACED AS INDICATED.3. CORNER BARS TO MATCH WALL REINFORCEMENT.

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S1.3TYPICAL DETAILS

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

N.T.S.S1.3

F LT GAUGE STEEL CONVERSION CHARTN.T.S.S1.3

E TYPICAL SILL/HEADER & JAMB FRAMING

N.T.S.S1.3

H MOMENT CONNECTION

N.T.S.S1.3

P RTU SUPPORTS & OPENINGS

N.T.S.S1.3

M STRUCTURAL DETAIL (CHANNEL)

N.T.S.S1.3

D TYP DECK SUPPORT @ COLUMN

N.T.S.S1.3

R TYP FLOOR DECK ATTACHMENT

N.T.S.S1.3

N TYP JOIST BEARING ON BEAM

N.T.S.S1.3

Q TYP ROOF DECK ATTACHMENT

N.T.S.S1.3

L TYP SECTION @ JST EXTN.T.S.S1.3

K TYP STRUT END JOIST DETAILN.T.S.S1.3

J TYPICAL FLANGE CONNECTION DETAIL

N.T.S.S1.3

G RADIUSED LINTEL DETAIL

N.T.S.S1.3

A TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION & CONTROL JOINT DETAILSN.T.S.S1.3

C TYP THICKENED SLAB @ STRINGERSN.T.S.S1.3

B TYP CONCRETE WALL REINFORCEMENT

1111

10

9

88

7

66

5

4

3

22

A

A

B

B

C

C

F

F

G

G

H

H

E.9D

1

10 5/8" O.F. CONC

11 3/4" O.F. STUD17' - 8"

11 3/4" O.F. STUD

19' - 10 1/4"

1' - 0"

18' - 0"

1' - 0"

19' - 10 1/4" O.F. CONC

11 3/4" O.F. STUD

17' - 8"

11 3/4" O.F. STUD

10 5/8" O.F. CONC

14' -

3 5

/8" 10

5/8

" O.F

. CO

NC

11 3

/4" O

.F. S

TUD

3' -

4"

16' -

2 1

/2"

3' -

0 3/

8"5'

- 10

"4'

- 2"

10' -

5 1

/8"

15' -

0 7

/8"

10' -

0"

2' -

4 1/

8"10

3/4

" O.F

. STU

D

10 5

/8" O

.F. C

ON

C

10 5/8" O.F. CONC

11 3/4" O.F. STUD

17' - 8"

11 3/4" O.F. STUD

19' - 10 1/4" 20' - 0" 19' - 10 1/4" O.F. CONC

11 3/4" O.F. STUD

17' - 8"

11 3/4" O.F. STUD

10 5/8" O.F. CONC

1' -

10 3

/8" O

.F. S

TUD

28' -

4 7

/8"

14' -

7 1

/8"

27' -

5"

10 3

/4" O

.F. S

TUD

10 5

/8" O

.F. C

ON

C98' - 11 1/2" O.F. STUD TO O.F. STUD

2' -

0"

FF 100'-0"

CONSTRUCTION/CONTROL JT PER TYP DETAIL

F3 F3

F2F2

F2F4

F4

F4

F4F2

F2

F4

F4

F4

F4

F2

T/FTG 99' - 4" TYP-UNO

REINF CORNERS PER TYP DETAIL-TYP

C2

C2C2

C2

H

S3.1A

S3.1B

S3.1

C

S3.1

J

S3.1

5' - 0"5' - 0"

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYPA

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

A

S3.1

TYP

H

S3.1

C

S3.1

TYP

C

S3.1

TYPC

S3.1

TYP

J

S3.1

TYP

J

S3.1

TYP

F

S3.1

E

S3.1

E

S3.1

F

S3.1F

S3.1

F

S3.1

5' -

0"5'

- 0"

5' -

0"5'

- 0"

B

S3.1

OPEN

C.9 E.1

5' - 6 9/16" 8' - 10 7/8" 5' - 6 9/16"

S2.7C

S2.7A

D

S3.1

G

S3.1

TYP

C2C2

T/MAT 95' - 0"

C3 C1

C1 C1

C1

C3

C3

C3

C3

C1

C2C2

C1C3

C3

C3

C4

C4

COORD EXACT COL LOCATION w/ ELEV. MFR.

S2.4E

S2.4E

S2.4D

S2.4D

SIM

S2.4D

SIM

S2.4D

S2.4D

S2.4D

S1.2B

TYP-UNO

NOTE:COORD EDGE OF SLAB BASED ON 8" OR 10" CMU STARTER COURSE GROUTED SOLID-COORD w/ ARCH.

NOTE:TRENCH & COLUMN FOOTINGS SHALL BE POURED IN A CONTINOUS POUR

WHERE THE TRENCH FOOTING RUNS PAST (ADJACENT) TO THE COLUMN

FOOTING-TYP.

SIM

SIM

SIM

T/FTG 99' - 4" T/FTG 99' - 4"

FOUNDATION PLANSHEET NOTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1. SEE SHEETS S1.1-S1.3 FOR GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS.2. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STAIR DIMENSIONS, SECTIONS, AND ELEVATIONS.3. COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION OF ROUGH OPENINGS IN CONCRETE WALLS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS.4. PILASTER SIZES ARE MEASURED FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF CONCRETE WALL TO INSIDE FACE OF CONCRETE - UNO5. 4" CONCRETE SLAB REINFORCED WITH ONE LAYER OF 6x6 - W1.4xW1.4 WWR ON 10 MIL. POLY VAPOR BARRIER OVER 4"

MINIMUM COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL. REINFORCEMENT TO BE LOCATED IN THE MIDDLE OF THE SLAB.6. ALL ELEVATIONS ARE REFERENCED FROM FINISHED MAIN FLOOR = 100'-0"

• T/FTG = TOP OF FOOTING = PER PLAN• T/CONC = TOP OF CONCRETE = PER PLAN

7. ALL EXTERIOR WALL SHEATHING NOT SPECIFIED AS "SHEAR WALL SHEATHING" IS TO BE 1/2" FIRE RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD SHEATHING AND ATTACHED PER IBC TABLE 2304.9.1 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED BY ARCHITECT.

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S2.1FOUNDATION PLAN

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

COLUMN SCHEDULEMARK SIZE BASE PLATE ANCHOR BOLTS

C1 W12x40 3/4"x16"x16" 4-3/4"dia w/ 12" EMB MINC2 W12x50 1 1/4" THICK-REFER

TO SHEET S2.412 OR 8 3/4"dia w/ 12" EMB

MIN (SEE SHEET S2.4)

C3 W12x136 1 1/2"x20"x20" 6-3/4"dia w/ 12" EMB MINC4 HSS4x4x3/8" PER SECTION PER SECTION

FOOTING SCHEDULEType Mark SIZE REINFORCING

F1 4' - 0"x4' - 0"x2' - 0" #5 BARS @ 12"oc-EW, T & BF2 6' - 0"x6' - 0"x2' - 0" #5 BARS @ 12"oc-EW, T & BF3 7' - 0"x7' - 0"x2' - 0" #5 BARS @ 12"oc-EW, T & BF4 8' - 0"x8' - 0"x2' - 0" #5 BARS @ 12"oc-EW, T & B

1111

1010

99

88

77

66

55

4

33

22

A

A

B

B

C

C

F

F

G

G

H

H

E.9D

11

2' - 1" 15' - 11" 2' - 1"

2' -

0"16

' - 7

1/8

"2'

- 1"

2' -

0"16

' - 7

1/8

"2'

- 1"

1' - 0 1/2" 1' - 0 1/2"

1' -

0 1/

2"

1' -

0 1/

2"

1' -

0 1/

2"

1' -

0 1/

2"

1' - 0 1/2" 1' - 0 1/2"

8" 8' - 4" 8"

8"

5' -

7 5/

8"

11' - 8"

C.9 E.1

2' -

0"10

' - 1

1/2

"

2' -

0"10

' - 1

1/2

"

2' - 0" 36' - 10 3/8" 5' - 0" 13' - 0" 5' - 0" 36' - 10 3/8" 2' - 0"

2' -

0"2'

- 0"

21' -

6 3

/8"

5' -

0"13

' - 0

"5'

- 0"

20' -

2 3

/8"

2' -

0"

1' -

4"2'

- 0"

4' - 6"

4' - 6"

2' -

0"2'

- 0"

10' -

1 1

/2"

11' -

4 7

/8"

5' -

0"13

' - 0

"5'

- 0"

1' -

1 1/

8"19

' - 1

1/4

"2'

- 0"

1' -

4"

2' -

0"

NOTE:1.ALL COLUMN FOOTINGS TO BE CENTERD UNDER COLUMN-UNO.2. COORD ELEVATOR DIMENSIONS WITH ELEVATOR MFR.

10 3

/8"

2' - 0" 17' - 6 3/8" 18' - 4" 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 15' - 0" 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 18' - 4" 17' - 6 3/8" 2' - 0"

3' -

6"

EQ

EQ

3' -

4"

3' -

4"

2' -

0"

1' -

0"1'

- 0"

1' - 0"1' - 0"

EQ EQ

3' - 6" 3' - 6"

EQ EQ

7' -

2"

2' -

2 1/

8"

1' -

3 7/

8"

8"

1' -

3 7/

8" 3' -

6"

8" 8' - 4" 8"

DIMENSIONED FOUNDATION PLANSHEET NOTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1. SEE SHEETS S1.1-S1.3 FOR GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS.2. REFER TO SHEET S2.1 FOR BALANCE OF INFORMATION.

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S2.1ADIMENSIONED FOUNDATION PLAN

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

1111

10

9

88

7

66

5

4

3

22

A

A

B

B

C

C

F

F

G

G

H

H

OPEN

5 3/4" I.F. STUD 17' - 8"

11 3/4" I.F. STUD

19' - 10 1/4" 20' - 0" 19' - 10 1/4"

11 3/4" I.F. STUD

17' - 8"

5 3/4" I.F. STUD

28' -

4 7

/8"

14' -

7 1

/8"

27' -

5"

4 3/

4" I.

F. S

TUD

5 3/

4" I.

F. S

TUD

3' -

4"16

' - 2

1/2

"3'

- 0

3/8"

5' -

10"

4' -

2"10

' - 5

1/8

"15

' - 0

7/8

"10

' - 0

"2'

- 4

1/8"

4 3/

4" I.

F. S

TUD

D

S3.2

C

S3.2

A

S3.2

B

S3.2

FF 116'-8"

B

S3.2

Sim

8 7/

8" I.

F. S

TUD

A

S3.2

TYPA

S3.2

TYPA

S3.2

TYP

A

S3.2

TYP

A

S3.2

TYPA

S3.2

TYPA

S3.2

TYPA

S3.2

TYP

D

S3.2

TYPD

S3.2

TYP

D

S3.2

TYP

C

S3.2

TYPC

S3.2

TYP

C

S3.2

TYPSIM

SIM

BOX HDR BY MTL STUD DESIGNER-TYP

SEE NOTE #2

5 3/4" I.F. STUD

17' - 8"

5 3/4" I.F. STUD

20' - 4 1/4" 20' - 0" 20' - 4 1/4"

5 3/4" I.F. STUD

17' - 8"

5 3/4" I.F. STUD

6' - 7" +/-

OPEN 7"

3 3/

4"

3 3/4" +/-

5 7/

8"

W14X22 (6)

W24X55(12)

W12

X16

W14X22 (6) W24X55(12)

W12

X16

W21

X93

(10)

W18

X71

(4)

W21

X93

(10)

W14X22 (6)

W24X55(12)

W14X22 (6)

W24X55(12)

W24

X55

(4)

T/S

TL 1

16' -

3 1

/2"

W24

X76

(8)

W24

X55

(4)

W24

X55

(6)

W24

X55

(4)

W24

X76

(8)

W24

X55

(4)

W24

X55

(6)

W12

X14

(2)

W12

X14

(2)

W14X22 (6)

W14X22 (6)

W16X31 (6)

W16X31 (6)

W12

X14

(4)

W16X31 (6)

W14X22 (6)

W14X22 (6)

W14X22 (6)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

C.9 E.1

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

3' -

4"4'

- 9

3/4"

4' -

9 3/

4"4'

- 9

3/4"

4' -

9 3/

4"5'

- 10

"4'

- 2"

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

5' -

0"5'

- 0"

2' -

4"

4 7/

8" I.

F. S

TUD

5 3/

4" I.

F. S

TUD

3' -

4"E

QE

QE

QE

Q5'

- 10

"4'

- 2"

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

5' -

0"5'

- 0"

2' -

4 1/

8"

4 3/

4" I.

F. S

TUD

5' - 6 9/16" 8' - 10 7/8" 5' - 6 9/16"

S2.7B

S2.7D

W12X14 (4)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

W24X55(12)

G

S3.2

G

S3.2

Sim

G

S3.2

Sim

G

S3.2

Sim

E

S3.2

H

S1.3

TYPH

S1.3

TYP

W12

X16

W12

X16

7 7/

8"

4' -

9 3/

4"6'

- 6"

5 3/

4" I.

F. S

TUD

LINTEL PER SCHED-COORD w/ ARCH FOR RADIUSED LINTEL LOCATIONS-TYP

W14X22 (6)

W14X22 (6)

W21

X93

W18

X71

W21

X93

HSS4x4x3/8"HSS4x4x3/8"

W12X14 (2)

W12X14 (2)

17k 16k

24k 24k

18k 16k

50k

48k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k27

k23

k48

k50

k

13k

13k

58k

56k

15k

11k

40k

43k

14k 14k

14k 14k

11k 11k

W12X14

14k 15k

12k 12k

12k 12k

9k 10k

16k

16k

58k

53k

18k

14k

40k

43k

16k 17k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

24k 24k

25k 25k

22k 22k

24k 24k

25k 25k

23k 23k

23k 23k

23k 23k

16k 18k

193k

-ft22

7k-ft

113k

-ft12

4k-ft

244k

-ft20

8k-ft

50k

48k

27k

23k

48k

50k

193k

-ft22

7k-ft

113k

-ft12

4k-ft

244k

-ft20

8k-ft

NOTE TO STEEL CONNECTION DESIGNER:1. REACTIONS SHOWN HERE ARE FACTORED ULTIMATE (LRFD) VALUES.2. MOMENT FRAME BEAM-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS REQUIRE CONTINUITY PLATES AND/OR DOUBLER PLATES. DESIGN AS REQUIRED BY CODE.3. REACTIONS LESS THAN 10k NOT SHOWN. DESIGN FOR 10k MIN OR AS REQUIRED BY CODE.

MOMENT FRAME CONNECTION DESIGN:(LRFD-NOFURTHER INCREASE REQUIRED)VU REQD=162kMUREQD=1320k-ft

CANOPY BEAM ATTACHMENT TO LOW

BM-BY OTHERS

W16x31 STL BM (LOW) FOR CANOPY BEAM ATTACHMENT(T/STL = VERIFY w/ CANOPY ENGINEER)

SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLANSHEET NOTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1. SEE SHEETS S1.1-S1.3 FOR GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS.2. FLOOR CONSTRUCTION: 2 1/2" NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE SLAB REINFORCED WITH ONE LAYER OF 6x6-W1.4xW1.4 WWF

(REINFORCEMENT TO BE LOCATED HALFWAY BETWEEN TOP OF SLAB AND TOP OF DECK) ON 2"x20ga,GALVANIZED, COMPOSITE (4 1/2" TOTAL SLAB THICKNESS) TYPE "VLI" STEEL DECK OVER STEEL BEAMS. ATTACH DECK TO SUPPORTS WITH #14 TEK SCREWS OR 5/8"dia PUDDLE WELDS, AND AT SIDELAPS WITH #10 TEK SCREWS OR WELDS. ATTACH IN A 36/4 ATTACHMENT PATTERN WITH (5) SIDELAPS PER DECK SPAN FOR ENTIRE FLOOR. SEE TYPICAL DETAILS FOR ATTACHMENT.

3. (#)-INDICATES NUMBER OF SHEAR STUDS ON EA. BEAM. SHEAR STUDS SHALL BE PER GEN. NOTES & TYPICAL DETAILS (VERIFY w/ SHOP DRAWINGS).

4. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STAIR DIMENSIONS, SECTIONS, AND ELEVATIONS.5. MAXIMUM BEAM SPACING = 6'-0"oc6. ALL ELEVATIONS ARE REFERENCED FROM FINISHED MAIN FLOOR = 100'-0"

• T/STL = TOP OF STEEL ELEVATION = 116'-3 1/2"DENOTES MOMENT CONNECTION.

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S2.2SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

1111

10

9

88

7

66

5

4

3

22

A

A

B

B

C

C

F

F

G

G

H

H

LOCATE STL BM UNDER EDGE OF MANSARD-TYP

LOCATE STL BM UNDER EDGE OF MANSARD-TYP

2.5K2 JST SUBSTITUTE @ 3 EQ SPACES

3' -

4"8'

- 11

1/4

"7'

- 3

1/4"

3' -

0 3/

8"5'

- 10

"4'

- 2"

10' -

5 1

/8"

15' -

0 7

/8"

1' -

4 3/

4"

8' -

7 1/

4"2'

- 4

1/8"

3' -

4"8'

- 11

1/4

"16

' - 1

5/8

"14

' - 7

1/8

"27

' - 5

"

17' - 8" 20' - 10" 20' - 0" 20' - 10" 17' - 8"

T/S

TL 1

34' -

3 3

/8"

T/S

TL 1

33' -

11"

T/S

TL 1

33' -

5 7

/8"

T/S

TL 1

33' -

5 7

/8"

T/S

TL 1

34' -

3 3

/8"

T/S

TL 1

33' -

11"

H

S3.2

J

S3.2

C

S3.3

D

S3.3

A

S3.3

J

S3.2

TYP

J

S3.2

TYPJ

S3.2

TYP

C

S3.3

A

S3.3

TYPA

S3.3

TYP

A

S3.3

TYP

B

S3.3

B

S3.3

B

S3.3

B

S3.3

N

S1.3

TYP

N

S1.3

TYP

BOX HDR BY MTL STUD DESIGNER-TYP

ROOF HATCH-LOCATE PER ARCH

4' -

5 5/

8"4'

- 5

5/8"

EQ

EQ

EQ

2' -

11"

2' -

11"

4' -

2"E

QE

QE

Q2'

- 11

"2'

- 11

"E

QE

QE

Q

1' -

4 3/

4"

4' -

3 5/

8"4'

- 3

5/8"

2.5K2 JST SUBSTITUTE @ 3 EQ SPACES

RTU2000#-MAX

17' - 8" 20' - 10" 20' - 0" 20' - 10" 17' - 8"

W12X16

W21X44

W18X40

W21

X93

W18

X71

W21

X93

W12X16

W21X44

W18X40

W14

X22

W21

X44

W16

X26

W18

X35

W12

X16

W14

X22

W21

X44

W16

X26

W18

X35

W12

X16

T/S

TL 1

33' -

5 7

/8"

W12

X16

T/S

TL 1

33' -

5 7

/8"

W12X19

T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

W12X16

T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

W18

X71

W21

X93

W12X16

W12X16

W21X44

W21X44

W18X40

W18X40

W12

X16

W21

X93

C.9 E.1

24K1024K10 18K3

24K10 18K3 24K10

W12

X16

W12

X16

W12X16

T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

W12X16

T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

W16X31

T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

W16X31

T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

W12X22

T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

W12X16 T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

W12X16

T/STL 133' - 8 3/8"

F

S3.2

EQ

EQ

EQ

RTU2000#-MAX

RTU2000#-MAX

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

RTU2000#-MAX

NOTE:JOIST DESIGNER REFER TO PARTIAL ROOF LOADING PLAN & DETAILS FOR LOADING, NOT SHOWN HERE FOR CLARITY.

LINTEL PER SCHED-COORD w/ ARCH FOR RADIUSED LINTEL LOCATIONS-TYP

K

S1.3

Sim

K

S1.3

Sim

3' - 8" +/- 13' - 5" +/-

5' - 8" +/- 1' - 2" +/-13' - 4" +/- 3' - 8" +/-

J

S1.3

TYPJ

S1.3

TYP

20k

22k

23k

19k

11k

11k

21k

21k

21k

21k

24K10SP

24K10SP

24K9SP

24K9SP

24K9SP

24K9SP

24K12SP

24K12SP

24K12SP

24K10SP

24K9SP

24K9SP

24K10SP

24K10SP

24K10SP

24K10SP

24K9SP

24K9SP

24K9SP

24K9SP

24K12SP

24K12SP

24K12SP

24K10SP

24K9SP

24K9SP

24K10SP

24K10SP

18K3

18K3SP

18K3SP

18K3SP

18K3SP

18K3

18K3

18K3

18K3

18k

16k

18k

16k

64k-

ft98

k-ft

11k

56k-

ft

11k

52k-

ft92

k-ft

61k-

ft

20k

22k

23k

19k

64k-

ft98

k-ft

11k

56k-

ft

11k

52k-

ft92

k-ft

61k-

ft

NOTE TO STEEL CONNECTION DESIGNER:1. REACTIONS SHOWN HERE ARE FACTORED ULTIMATE (LRFD) VALUES.2. MOMENT FRAME BEAM-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS REQUIRE CONTINUITY PLATES AND/OR DOUBLER PLATES. DESIGN AS REQUIRED BY CODE.3. REACTIONS LESS THAN 10k NOT SHOWN. DESIGN FOR 10k MIN OR AS REQUIRED BY CODE.

HOIST BM

HSS4x4x3/8"

MOMENT FRAME CONNECTION DESIGN:(LRFD-NOFURTHER INCREASE REQUIRED)VU REQD=162kMUREQD=1320k-ft

ROOF FRAMING PLANSHEET NOTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1. SEE SHEETS S1.1-S1.3 FOR GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS.2. PROVIDE HORIZONTAL JOIST BRIDGING AND SPACING PER LATEST SJI MANUAL.3. JOIST MANUFACTURER TO COORDINATE WITH CONTRACTORS TO DETERMINE RTU AND TRANSFORMER LAYOUTS, WEIGHTS,

AND FOOTPRINTS. JOIST MANUFACTURER TO COORDINATE ROOF HATCH SUPPLIER FOR SIZE AND LOCATION. RTU AND EXHAUST HOOD LOADS ARE TO BE IN ADDITION TO OTHER DESIGN LOADS.

4. MAXIMUM JOIST SPACING = 5'-0" UNO5. ROOF CONSTRUCTION: 1 1/2"x22ga GALVANIZED TYPE "B" METAL ROOF DECK ATTACHED TO SUPPORTS WITH #14 TEK SCREWS,

AND AT SIDELAPS WITH #10 TEK SCREWS. ATTACH IN A 36/7 SCREW PATTERN WITH (6) SIDELAP SCREWS PER JOIST SPAN FOR A 15'-0" FOOT MIN WIDE STRIP AROUND THE PERIMETER. ATTACH IN A 36/4 SCREW PATTERN WITH (4) SIDELAP SCREWS PER JOIST SPAN FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE ROOF. SEE TYPICAL DETAILS FOR ATTACHMENT.

6. ALL ELEVATIONS ARE REFERENCED FROM FINISHED MAIN FLOOR = 100'-0"• T/STL = TOP OF STEEL ELEVATION = PER PLAN

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S2.3ROOF FRAMING PLAN

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

1111

10

9

88

7

66

5

4

3

22

A

A

B

B

C

C

F

F

G

G

H

H

E.9D

HIP T

RUSSHIP

TRUSS

HIP TRUSSHIP TRUSS

HIP TRUSS HIP T

RUSS

NOTE:1. ALL MANSARD TRUSSED TO BE PRE-FABRICATED METAL STUD TRUSSES.2. TRUSS DESIGNER REFER TO PARTIAL ROOF LOADING PLAN & DETAILS FOR LOADING INFORMATION, NOT SHOWN HERE FOR CLARITY.3. TRUSS LAYOUT & SPACING SHOWN HERE IS SUGGESTED. TRUSS DESIGNER TO DETERMINE FINAL TRUSS LAYOUT & SPACING;INCLUDING GIRDER,HIP TRUSSES AS REQ'D.

SEE NOTE #4-TYP

SEE NOTE #4-TYP

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ EQEQ EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

GIR

DE

R T

RU

SS

GIR

DE

R T

RU

SS

MTL STUD OVERFRAMING BY MTL STUD DESIGNER

TRUSS BLKG AS REQ'D-TYP

HIP TRUSSHIP TRUSSHIP T

RUSS HIP T

RUSS

HIP T

RUSS

HIP TRUSS

MANSARD TRUSS FRAMING PLANSHEET NOTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1. SEE SHEETS S1.1-S1.3 FOR GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS.2. ALL ELEVATIONS ARE REFERENCED FROM FINISHED MAIN FLOOR = 100'-0"

• TRUSS/BRG = TRUSS BEARING ELEVATION = VARIES-SEE SECTIONS3. MAXIMUM TRUSS SPACING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE: 2'-0"4. ROOF SHEATHING PER MARK R1 OF TYPICAL MANSARD ROOF SHEATHING DETAIL.5. REFER TO SHEET S2.3 FOR BALANCE OF INFORMATION.

SHEATHING & SCREWING SCHEDULE

MARKSHT'GTHICK

SCREW SIZE

BSSPACING

ESSPACING

FSSPACING

TRANSV BLK'G

EDGEMEMBERTHICKN

R1 19/32" #12 6" 6" 12" NO 2"

BOUNDARY (SHEATHING MAY EXTEND BEYOND BOUNDARY)

BOUNDARYSCREWING (BS)

BLKG @ TRANSVERSEJOINTS IF REQD (SEESCHEDULE)

FIELD SCREWING (FS)AT INTERMEDIATESUPPORTS

CENTER EDGES OFSHT'G ON FRAMING

EDGE SCREWING (ES),STAGGER PER TYPICAL DETAIL

3/8" MIN EDGEDIST FOR SCREWS

PROVIDE 1/8" GAPBTWN ALL PANELENDS & EDGES, TYP

JOIST SIZE & SPCGPER FRAMING PLAN

NOTE:1.SHEATHING SCREWS SHALL BE DRIVEN SO THAT THEIR HEADS ARE FLUSH WITH THE SURFACE OF THE SHEATHING.2. SHEATHING SHALL BE FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED, SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S2.3BMANSARD ROOF FRAMING

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

N.T.S.S2.3B

A TYPICAL MANSARD ROOF SHEATHING DETAIL

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

A

A

B

B

C

C

D

HIP T

RUSSHIP

TRUSS

HIP TRUSS

SN

OW

LO

AD

7' -

0"

SN

OW

LO

AD

7' -

0"

SL MAX = 43PSF

SL MAX = 50PSF

SL MAX = 43PSF

SNOW LOAD

8' - 6"

EQ

EQ

EQ EQ

EQ

EQ

TRUSS DESIGNER, ADD 5psf DL TO TOP CHORD UNDER OVERFRAMING-TYP

PARTIAL ROOF LOADING PLANSHEET NOTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1. SEE SHEETS S1.1-S1.3 FOR GENERAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS.2. REFER TO SHEET S2.3 & S2.3B FOR BALANCE OF INFORMATION.

SL (MAX) = SEE PLAN

INSIDE EDGE OF MANSARD

SEE PLAN (VARIES)

TYPICAL STEEL JOIST & MANSARD TRUSS LOAD DIAGRAM

JOIST SUPPORT

MANSARD TRUSS OUTLINE

Pd=225LBSPl=0

Ps=345lbs

JOIST SUPPORT

Pd=225LBSPl=0

Ps=345lbsWwind (C & C):+32psf (ALL ZONES)-24psf (INTERIOR)-27psf (CORNER)"a"= PER GEN. NOTES

JOIST DESIGNER TO ALSO DESIGN ALL JOISTS FOR LOAD CASE WHERE TRUSS IS NOT YET INSTALLED (SEE ALT SNOW DRIFT DIAGRAM

NOTE:LOADS SHOWN ARE UNFACTORED NOMINAL (ASD) LOADS. NOTE TO JOIST DESIGNER: ACCOUNT FOR ADDITIONAL SNOW DRIFT LOADS FOR JOISTS NEAR AND PARALLEL TO MANSARD ROOF EDGE (SEE PLAN). NOTE TO TRUSS DESIGNER: POINT LOADS INDICATED ON THIS DIAGRAM ARE APPROXIMATE (CONSERVATIVE) REACTIONS TO BE USED BY THE STEEL JOIST DESIGNER. TRUSS DESIGNER TO DESIGN TRUSS MEMBERS FOR ACTUAL SELF-WEIGHT AND OTHER LOADS INDICATED HERE.

Wwind (C & C):+10psf (ZONE 1), + 13psf (ZONE 2 & 3)-15psf (ZONE 1), -22psf (ZONE 2 & 3)-22psf (OVERHANG)W:snow +17psf (UNIFORM)

SL MAX (N-S, LONG DISTANCE) = 33psfSL MAX (E-W, SHORT DIRECTION) = 33psf

SL (MIN) = 14 PSFBLD

G E

DG

E

ALT SNOW DRIFT LOAD DIAGRAM (STL JST DIAGRAM)

JOIST SUPPORT

9'-6" FT (E-W, SHORT DIRECTION)

9'-6" FT (N-S, LONG DIRECTION)

NOTE:DETAIL TO BE USED BY STEEL JOIST DESIGNER FOR LOAD CASE WHERE TRUSSES ARE NOT YET INSTALLED. THIS DRIFT DESIGN IS BASED ON A FICTITIOUS 2ft TALL MAX PARAPET AT BUILDING EDGE.

JOIST SUPPORT

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S2.3CPARTIAL ROOF LOADING PLAN

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

75

10' - 0"

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANT/STL

WP = 115' - 3 3/4"WP = 115' - 3 3/4"

WP = 132' - 11" WP = 132' - 11"

PER PLANT/FTG

S2.4A

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4B

SimTYP

S2.4B

Sim

S2.4CPROVIDE 4-TIES IN UPPER

18" OF FTG HT EQ SPACED BTWN HOOKED BARS

FTG SIZE & REINF PER PLAN/SCHED-PROVIDE STD

HOOKS @ BOTT OF FTG-TYP

FTG REINF PER PLAN NOTE-TYP, PROVIDE 3 BARS IN UPPER 18" OF FTG HT, EQ SPACED, PROVIDE 180deg HOOKS OF TOP 3-BARS AROUND AB'S (ALT SIDES)-TYP EA END

DESIGN CONNECTIONS FOR BRACE FORCES: (LRFD-NO FURTHER INCREASES REQUIRED)

Pu,c=685k COMPRESSIONPu,t=870k TENSION

HSS8

X8x1

/2"H

SS8X8x1/2"

HSS8X8x1/2"HS

S8X8

x1/2

"

HSS8

X8x1

/2"H

SS8X8x1/2"

HSS8X8x1/2"HS

S8X8

x1/2

"

LOOP FTG VERT REINF EW, UNDER BP AS SHOWN

5' -

4"

7 5

PER PLANT/FTG

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANT/STL

WP = 99' - 4"

WP = 132' - 11"WP = 132' - 11"

10' - 0"

WP = 115' - 3 3/4"WP = 115' - 3 3/4"

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4B

Sim

S2.4B

Sim

TYP OH

S2.4C

SimTYP

NOTE:REFER TO DETAIL F/S2.4 FOR BALANCE OF INFORMATION NOT SHOWN HERE.



HSS8

x8x1

/2" HSS8x8x1/2"

HSS8x8x1/2" HSS8

x8x1

/2"

HSS8

x8x1

/2" HSS8x8x1/2"

HSS8x8x1/2" HSS8

x8x1

/2"

109

10' - 0"

PER PLANT/FTG

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANT/STL

WP = 115' - 3 3/4"

WP = 115' - 3 3/4"

WP = 132' - 10"

WP = 132' - 10"

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4B

S2.4C

Sim




HSS8

x8x1

/2" HSS8x8x1/2"

HSS8x8x1/2" HSS8

x8x1

/2"

HSS8

x8x1

/2" HSS8x8x1/2"

HSS8x8x1/2" HSS8

x8x1

/2"

2' -

0"

GUSSET PL, t = 3/4" MIN

GUSSET PL THROUGH HSS

BRACE PER ELEVATION-TYP

TYPERECTION BOLT-TYP

t, A

S R

EQ

'D

GUSSET PL

A-AA

ATYP

GUSSET PL, t = 3/4" MIN-TYP

GUSSET PL THROUGH HSS-TYP


ERECTION BOLT-TYP

WPWP

GUSSET PL, t = 3/4" MIN-TYP

GUSSET PL THROUGH HSS-TYP


ERECTION BOLT-TYP

BASE PL & AB PER DETAIL D & E/S2.4

COL PER SCHED

FTG PER PLAN

3/4"x14"x4" SHEAR PL CENTERED w/ COL-GROUT SOLIDFOR TWO DIRECTION BRACE

LOCATIONS, PROVIDE SHEAR PL BOTH DIRECTIONS

1' - 10"

2' -

0"

3"1' - 4"3"

3"6"

6"6"

3"

TYP

TYP

8"1'

- 4"

NOTE:ALL ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE PER SCHED

6" M

IN-T

YP

FTG EDGE

2' -

0"

2' - 6"

3"1'

- 2"

4"3"

TYPTYP

3" 6" 6" 6" 9"

1' - 0" 1' - 6"

2" MIN-TYP

NOTE:ALL ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE PER SCHED

FTG PER SCHED

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S2.4BRACING ELEVATIONS

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

1/2" = 1'-0"S2.4

F FRAMING ELEVATION 1/2" = 1'-0"S2.4

G FRAMING ELEVATIONN.T.S.S2.4

H FRAMING ELEVATION

DETAIL 1" = 1'-0"S2.4

A DETAIL 1" = 1'-0"S2.4

B DETAIL 1" = 1'-0"S2.4

C 1" = 1'-0"S2.4

E BRACE PLATE DETAIL ONE DIRECTION 1" = 1'-0"S2.4

D BRACE PLATE DETAIL TWO DIRECTION

10 9

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/FTG

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANT/STL

10' - 0"

WP = 99' - 4"WP = 99' - 4"

WP = 115' - 3 3/4"

WP = 115' - 3 3/4"

WP = 132' - 11 7/8"

WP = 132' - 11 7/8"

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4B

SimTYP

S2.4B

SimSIM OH

S2.4C

Sim




HSS8

x8x1

/2"HSS8x8x1/2"

HSS8x8x1/2"HSS8

x8x1

/2"

HSS8

x8x1

/2"HSS8x8x1/2"

HSS8x8x1/2"HSS8

x8x1

/2"

2' -

0"

CF20' - 0"

PER PLANT/FTG

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANT/STL

WP = 99' - 4" WP = 99' - 4"

WP = 115' - 7 1/2"WP = 115' - 7 1/2"

WP = 133' - 0 1/2"WP = 133' - 0 1/2"

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4A

TYP

S2.4B

SimTYP

S2.4B

Sim

S2.4C

SimTYP




HSS8x8x1

/2"HSS8x8x1/2"

HSS8x8x1/2"HSS8x8x1

/2"

HSS8x8x1

/2"HSS8x8x1/2"

HSS8x8x1/2"HSS8x8x1

/2"

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T


TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

1/2" = 1'-0"S2.5

A FRAMING ELEVATIONN.T.S.S2.5

B FRAMING ELEVATION

C F

20' - 0"

WP = 99' - 4"

WP = 115' - 7 1/2"

PER PLANT/FTG

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANT/STL

S2.4B

SimTYP

S2.4B

SimSIM OH

S2.4C

SimTYP OH




HSS8x8x1

/2"

HSS8x8x1/2"

WP = 133' - 0 1/2"

C F

PER PLANT/FTG

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANT/STL

20' - 0"

WP = 99' - 4"

WP = 115' - 8 5/8"

WP = 133' - 2 1/4"

S2.4B

SimTYP

S2.4B

SimSIM OH

S2.4C

Sim




HSS8x8x1

/2"

HSS8x8x1/2"

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T


TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

1/2" = 1'-0"S2.6

A FRAMING ELEVATIONN.T.S.S2.6

B FRAMING ELEVATION

7

5

C F

F

S2.4

G

S2.4

B

S2.5

A

S2.6

REINF FTG w/ #5 @ 12"oc T & B-EW-TYP

C

S1.3

10' -

0" X

-BR

AC

ING

5 1/

8"10

' - 0

" X-B

RA

CIN

G

20' - 0" X-BRACING

T/FTG 99' - 4"

20' - 0" BRACING

T/FTG 99' - 4"

T/FTG 99' - 4"

T/FTG 99' - 4"T/FTG 99' - 4"

10

9

C F

H

S2.4

A

S2.5

B

S2.6

10' -

0" X

-BR

AC

ING

C

S1.3

T/FTG 99' - 4"

REINF FTG w/ #5 @ 12"oc T & B-EW-TYP

T/FTG 99' - 4"

10' -

0" X

-BR

AC

ING

20' - 0" BRACING

T/FTG 99' - 4"

7

5

C F

F

S2.4

G

S2.4

B

S2.5

A

S2.6

C12

X20

.7

T/S

TL 1

16' -

3 1

/2"

COORD w/ ARCH/STAIR MFR

6' - 7 3/4"

20' - 0" BRACING

10' -

0" X

-BR

AC

ING

10' -

0" X

-BR

AC

ING

20' - 0" X-BRACING

H

S2.7

L

S2.7

J

S2.7

5k5k

10

9

C F

H

S2.4

A

S2.5

B

S2.6E

S2.7

F

S2.7

K

S2.7

G

S2.7

COORD w/ ARCH/STAIR MFR

5' - 9 1/4"

C12

X20

.7

T/S

TL 1

16' -

3 1

/2"

10' -

0" X

-BR

AC

ING

10' -

0" X

-BR

AC

ING

20' - 0" BRACING

4k4k

9

8 7/8"

INTERIOR STUD PER ARCH-TYPPER PLAN

FF

PER PLANT/STL

CONC ON MTL DECKING PER PLAN

BM PER PLAN

CONT 3/8" BENT PL w/ MTL STUD CLIP @ EA STUD

1/4" 2-12TYP

1 3/

4"

#4 x 24"LG BAR @ 24"oc (SHOP OR FIELD WELD TO BENT PL &

TIE TO WWR IN FIELD)

C

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/STL

1/4" 2-12TYPCONT 4"x1"x1/4" BENT PL(LLV)


BM PER PLAN

INTERIOR STUD PER ARCH-TYP

SHEAR STUD PER PLAN-TYP

F

3/16" 2-12TYP


BM PER PLAN

CONT 4"x1"x1/4" BENT PL(LLV) w/ MTL STUD CLIP @ EA STUD

CHANNEL PER PLAN

CONT L4x4x1/4"

STAIRS PER ARCH

10

PER PLAN

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANFF


1/4" 2-12TYP

BM PER PLAN


CONT 3/8" BENT PL w/ MTL STUD CLIP @ EA STUD

#4 x 24"LG BAR @ 24"oc (SHOP OR FIELD WELD

TO BENT PL & TIE TO WWR IN FIELD) 1

3/4"

TY

P

5


1/4" 2-12TYP

CONT 3/8" BENT PL -EA SIDE

BM PER PLAN

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANFF

C9"

1/4" 2-12TYP

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANFF

BM PER PLAN


CONT 3/8" BENT PL



#4 x 24"LG BAR @ 24"oc (SHOP OR FIELD WELD TO BENT PL & TIE TO WWR IN FIELD)

F

1/4" 2-12TYP


BM PER PLAN

CONT 3/8" BENT PL

CHANNEL PER PLAN

CONT L4x4x1/4"

STAIRS PER ARCH

PER PLAN8 1/2"


#4 x 24"LG BAR @ 24"oc (SHOP OR FIELD WELD TO BENT PL & TIE TO WWR IN FIELD)

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S2.7CALL OUTS @ STAIRWELL

LOCATIONS

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifca

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

1/2" = 1'-0"S2.7

C STAIR FOUNDATION CALLOUT 1/2" = 1'-0"S2.7

A STAIR FOUNDATION CALLOUT

1/2" = 1'-0"S2.7

B STAIR FRAMING CALLOUT 1/2" = 1'-0"S2.7

D STAIR FRAMING CALLOUT

FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S2.7

E FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S2.7

F


KFRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S2.7

G FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S2.7

H FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S2.7

LFRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S2.7

J

2' - 0"

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/FTG

SLAB SIZE & REINF PER PLAN

6" x 16GA MTL STUDS @ 16"oc BY MTL STUD DESIGNER

CONT TRACK

EXT GRADE/SLAB PER CIVIL

VENEER PER ARCH

SHEATHING PER PLAN-TYP

4" CMU GROUTED SOLID,HORIZ REINF PER GEN. NOTES-

LOCATE PER ARCHFOR 6" x 16GA MTL STUDS BELOW WINDOWS, PROVIDE SIMPSON RCKW5.5 KNEEWALL CONNECTOR w/ 1/2"dia KWIK HUS SCREW ANCHOR (3" MIN EMB)-SPACING PER MTL STUD DESIGNER

2'-6

" MIN

-TY

P

2' -

0"

2-#5 CONT-T & B

#3 TIES @ 18"oc

#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

CONT #5

24"24"

#3 @ 48"oc w/ 18" MIN EMB INTO FTG

#3 @ 48"oc18"

18"

PE

R T

AB

L E

LAP

10" CMU GROUTED SOLID-LOCATE PER ARCH

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/FTG



VENEER PER ARCH

CONT TRACK


#5 @ 12"oc-EW T & B

2'-6

" MIN

-TY

P

2' -

0"


7' - 6"


#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

CONT #5

24"24"

P.A.F. PER MTL STUD DESIGNER-TYP


#3 @ 48"oc18"

18"


ARCH

PER

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/FTG


EXT SLAB PER CIVIL

OPNG PER ARCH#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

24"

24"CONT #5

2' - 0"COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL OR LEAN CONC FILL TO

FROST-FULL LENGTH OF DOOR SWING

2'-6

" MIN

-TY

P

2' -

0"

EQ EQ

FTG SIZE & REINF PER SCHED

2'-6

" MIN

-TY

P

PER PLANFF


COL PER SCHED

BASE PL & AB PER SCHED


VENEER PER ARCHSHEATHING PER PLAN-TYP

PER PLANT/FTG

CONT TRACK-TYP



#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

CONT #5

24"24"



#3 @ 48"oc18"

18"

PE

R T

AB

L E

LAP


PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/FTG

8 7/8"


COL PER SCHED

BASE PL & AB PER SCHEDEXT SLAB/GRADE PER CIVIL

CONT TRACK-TYP


VENEER PER ARCH

CONT WALL REINF THRU FTG-TYP



2'-6

" MIN

-TY

P

2' -

0"

2' - 0"FTG SIZE & REINF PER PLAN-EXTEND BARS INTO WALL FTG



#3 @ 48"oc18"

18"

PE

R T

AB

L E

LAP


NOTE:TRENCH & COLUMN FOOTINGS SHALL BE POURED IN A CONTINOUS POUR WHERE THE TRENCH FOOTING RUNS PAST (ADJACENT) TO THE COLUMN FOOTING-TYP


PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/FTG


CONT TRACK-TYP


VENEER PER ARCH-TYP


2'-6

" MIN

-TY

P

2' -

0"

#5 @ 12"oc-EW T & B4' - 6"


#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

CONT #5

24"24"



#3 @ 48"oc18"

18"

PE

R T

AB

LE

LAP


D

EQ EQ

FTG SIZE & REINF PER SCHED

PER PLANT/PIL

PER PLANT/FTG

EXT SLAB PER CIVILEXT SLAB PER CIVIL

COL, BP, AB BY OTHERSVENEER PER ARCH

2'-6

" MIN

-TY

P

4000PSI CONC FILL

E.9


2-#6 EW, TIED TO DWLS

#6 DWLS AROUND BP (2 MIN EA SIDE, 8 TOTAL)

26"

24"

C.9 E.1

PER PLAN

CO

OR

D P

IT D

EP

TH w

/ ELE

V. M

FR.

5' -

0"1'

- 0"

PER PLAN

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/MAT

8" 8"


COL PER PLAN

1' -

0"

4"

1 1/

2"9"

1 1/

2"

EQEQ

1/2" THICK BASE PL w/ 2-3/8"dia AB (9" EMB)

A-A

AA AA SLAB SIZE & REINF PER PLAN

COL PER PLAN

8" 8"#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

CONT #5 @ 12"oc

#5 DWLS @ 12"oc24"

24"

CONT #5

#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

CONT #5 @ 12"oc

#5 DWLS @ 12"oc24"

24"

CONT #5

PIT LENGTH & WIDTH (COORD w/ ELEV MFGR)

SUMP PIT 2'x2'x2'

WATERSTOP - TYP

TYP

6"5 15/16"PER PLAN PER PLAN

INTERIOR WALL PER ARCH-TYP

#5 @12"oc EW-T & B

PER PLAN

PER PLAN

1' -

0"

CO

OR

D P

IT D

EP

TH w

/ ELE

V. M

FR.

5' -

0"

#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

CONT #5 @ 12"oc

#5 DWLS @ 12"oc24"

24"

CONT #5

PIT LENGTH & WIDTH (COORD w/ ELEV MFGR)

WATERSTOP - TYP

PER PLANFF

PER PLANT/MAT

8"

#5 DWLS @ 12"oc

24"

CONT #5

L-4x4x5/16" w/ 1/2"dia EXP BOLTS @ 18"oc @ DOOR -VERIFY w/ ELEV MFGR



INTERIOR WALL PER ARCH

#5 @12"oc EW-T & B

48"

TRENCH FTG SIZE & REINF PER PLAN

LAP BOTT BARS OF FTG w/ MAT BARS PER TABLE

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S3.1SECTIONS

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC

FOUNDATION SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.1

A FOUNDATION SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.1

B


H


C


J


FFOUNDATION SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.1

E 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.1

D ELEVATOR FOUNDATION SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"S3.1

G ELEVATOR FOUNDATION SECTION

3

PER PLANT/STL

PER ARCHT/OPNG

PER PLAN

TRUSS PER PLAN

CURVED OVERFRAMING TO BE INSTALLED "IN THE FIELD"-DESIGN

BY MTL STUD DESIGNER

MTL STUD HDR PER MTL STUD DESIGNER


CONT TRACK T & B-TYP

OPNG PER ARCH


BM PER PLAN

1/4" 2-12TYP

CONT L6x4x5/16"

PER ARCH

BM PER PLAN

JST & MTL DECKING PER PLAN

CONT ST2x4.75 w/ MTL STUD CLIP @ EA TRUSS-TYP

3/16" 2-12

3/16"TYP-STAGGERED

SFC6.25 CLIP @ 24"oc

BLKG TRUSS-EA BAY


143'-4"T/MANSARD

10"

12"

STL LOOSE LINTEL PER SCHED (INCLUDING RADIUSED LINTEL)

SLOTTED SLIP TRACK BY STUD DESIGNER

NOTE:ACTUAL TRUSS PROFILE TO BE DESIGNED BY TRUSS DESIGNER

DRIFT/SLIP CONX BY MTL STUD DESIGNER (1" DRIFT, 1"

DEFLECTION)

LAP STUDS w/ TRUSS OVERHANG AS REQ'D BY MTL

STUD DESIGNER

2

13

VARIEST/STL

PER ARCHT/OPNG

GIRDER TRUSS PER PLAN

PER ARCH




OPNG PER ARCH


BM PER PLAN

1/4" 2-12TYP

CONT HSS6"x2"x5/16"-TYP

1/4"

1/4"HSS TO BM


BM PER PLAN BM PER PLANJST PER PLAN

ES-TYP


BLKG TRUSS-EA BAY

PER PLAN

143'-4"T/MANSARD

10"

12"

CONT L6x4x5/16" w/ DRIFT/SLIP CONX. BY MTL STUD DESIGNER (1" DRIFT, 1" DEFLECTION)



NOTE:ACTUAL TRUSS PROFILE TO BE DESIGNED BY TRUSS DESIGNERCONT ST2x4.75 w/ MTL STUD

CLIP @ EA TRUSS-TYP

3/16" 2-12

3/16"TYP-STAGGERED

PER PLAN

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANFF

PER ARCHT/OPNG


1/4"TYP

BM PER PLAN

CONT 3/8" BENT PL w/ MTL STUD SLIP CLIP/STRUT PER MTL STUD DESIGNER


VENEER PER ARCH


STL LOOSE LINTEL PER SCHED


CONT TRACK-TYP

OPNG PER ARCH

SHEAR STUD PER PLAN

(LOW) BM PER PLAN WHERE OCCURS

PER PLANT/STL

3

PER PLAN

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANFFCONC ON MTL DECKING PER PLAN

1/4"TYP

BM PER PLAN




VENEER PER ARCH


COL PER SCHED

A

H

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANFF


BM PER PLAN

COL PER SCHED


PER PLAN

VENEER PER ARCH




A

H

PER PLAN

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANFF

PER ARCHT/OPNG


BM PER PLAN


VENEER PER ARCH

CONT L4x4x1/4" w/ MTL STUD SLIP CLIP/STRUT @ EA STUD

1/4"TYP


STL LOOSE LINTEL PER SCHED

OPNG PER ARCH


CONT TRACK-TYP

CONT 3/8" BENT PL w/ MTL STUD SLIP CLIP/STRUT PER

MTL STUD DESIGNER


PER PLAN

BM PER PLAN


1/4"TYP

CONT 3/8" BENT PL

C.9 E.1PER PLAN

1' -

0"

4"

A-A

AA AA

TYP

1/2" CAP PL-TYPTYP

PER PLANT/STL

PER PLANFF

CONC ON MTL DECKING PER PLANCONC ON MTL DECKING PER PLAN

HSS PER PLAN

BM PER PLAN BM PER PLAN

CONT 3/8" BENT PL-INTERUPT ANGLE @ COLUMNS-TYP

HSS PER PLAN

HSS PER PLAN HSS PER PLAN

3/4"PL EA SIDE OF HSS FOR ELEV. RAIL ATTACHMENT. LOCATIONS,LENGTH,WIDTH,&

QUANTITY AS REQ;D COORD w/ ELEV. MFR.-TYP

3 SIDES PL TOHSS

C.9 E.1PER PLAN

TYP

HOIST BM PER PLAN

MTL DECKING PER PLAN

PER PLANT/STLPER PLAN

T/STL

HSS PER PLAN

1/2" CAP PL-TYP

BM PER PLANBM PER PLAN

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S3.2SECTIONS

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC


H FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.2

J


A FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.2

B FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.2

C FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.2

D


GFRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.2

E FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.2

F

A

PER PLANT/STL

PER ARCHT/OPNG

H

TRUSS PER PLAN

VA

RIE

S


PER ARCH

ES-TYP

BLKG TRUSS-EA BAY

1/4" 2-12TYP




OPNG PER ARCH

PER PLAN

143'-4"T/MANSARD

10"

12"


CONT HSS6x2x5/16" w/ MTL STUD CLIP @ EA TRUSS-TYP

BM & MTL DECKING PER PLAN





CONT L2x2x1/8"1/8"

ANGLE TO BM

1/4"

1/4"TYP HSS TOBM



3

VARIEST/STL

PER ARCHT/OPNG

12

TRUSS PER PLAN

PER ARCH

OVERHANG

ES-TYP

BLKG TRUSS-EA BAY




OPNG PER ARCH

1/4" 2-12TYP

PER PLAN

3/16" 2-12

3/16" 2-12TYP-STAGGERED

BM PER PLAN BM PER PLAN


143'-4"T/MANSARD

10"

12"







CONT ST2x4.75 w/ MTL STUD CLIP @ EA TRUSS-TYP

A

PER PLANT/STL

H

PER ARCH

OVERHANG

TRUSS PER PLAN

VA

RIE

S

BLKG TRUSS-EA BAYPER PLAN

1/4" 2-12TYP




BM PER PLAN

143'-4"T/MANSARD

10"

12"





CURVED OVERFRAMING TO BE INSTALLED "IN THE FIELD"-DESIGN

BY MTL STUD DESIGNER



CONT L2x2x1/8"1/8"

ANGLE TO BM

1/4"

1/4"TYP HSS TOBM

LAP STUDS w/ TRUSS OVERHANG AS REQ'D BY MTL

STUD DESIGNER

A

PER PLANT/STL

PER ARCHT/OPNG

TRUSS PER PLAN

VA

RIE

S

ES-TYP

BLKG TRUSS-EA BAY

PER ARCH

PER PLAN



OPNG PER ARCH

1/4" 2-12TYP




BM PER PLAN

143'-4"T/MANSARD

10"

12"









CONT L2x2x1/8"

1/8"ANGLE TO BM

1/4"

1/4"TYP HSS TOBM

DWG BY

PROJECT NO.

SHEET NO.

REVISIONS

DATE:


T: 314-395-9750F: 314-395-9751


TR,i Architects

#

TR

,i A

rchi

tect

sA

RC

HIT

EC

T

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L E

NG

INE

ER

PLU

MB

ING

EN

GIN

EE

R

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

EN

GIN

EE

R

CLI

EN

T

S3.3SECTIONS

TRPO-07-01-18

DLP

06-25-18

1281

8 D

AY

LIG

HT

CIR

CLE

ST

. LO

UIS

CO

UN

TY

, MIS

SO

UR

I

Sto

ck &

Ass

ocia

tes

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

DE

SIG

N/B

UIL

D

Aed

ifica

Cas

e E

ngin

eerin

g

Par

adig

m F

inan

cial

Adv

isor

s, L

LC


A FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.3

B


C FRAMING SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"S3.3

D